You are on page 1of 398

CYME

Power Engineering Software

CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual


and Users Guide
 Copyright CYME International T&D Inc.

All Rights Reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced, or transmitted in any form or by any means without the written permission
of CYME International T&D.

Possession or use of the CYME software described in this publication is authorized only pursuant to a valid written license
agreement from CYME.

CYME makes no warranty, either expressed or implied, including but not limited to any implied warranties of
merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose, regarding these materials and makes such materials available solely on
an "as-is" basis.

CYME International T&D reserves the right to revise and improve its products as it sees fit. The information in this manual
is subject to modification without notice.

While every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual, CYME assumes no responsibility for errors or
omissions, or for damages resulting from the use of the information contained herein.

The computer programs described in this manual were developed jointly by CYME International T&D Inc., Ontario Hydro
and McMaster University under the auspices of the Canadian Electricity Association (CEA). Neither CYME International
T&D, Ontario Hydro, McMaster University, CEA, nor any person acting on their behalf: (a) makes any warranty, express
or implied of any kind with regard to the use of the computer programs, the documentation and any information, method or
process disclosed therein, or that such use may not infringe privately owned rights; or (b) assumes any liabilities with
regard to the use of, or damages resulting from the use of the programs or other information contained in this document.

The software described in this document is furnished under a license agreement.

CYME International T&D Inc.


1485 Roberval, Suite 104
St. Bruno QC J3V 3P8
Canada

Tel.: (450) 461-3655


Fax: (450) 461-0966
Canada & United States: Tel.:1-800-361-3627

Internet : www.eaton.com\cyme
E-mail: cymesupport@eaton.com

Other Trademarks: The names of all products and services other than CYME’s mentioned in this document are the
trademarks or trade names of the respective owners.
CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Contents

1 – Getting Started ................................................................................................................... 1


Overview of CYMCAP ................................................................................................... 1
Computer System requirements ................................................................................... 2
Installing CYMCAP for Windows................................................................................... 2
Windows settings ............................................................................................. 2
The contents of CYMCAP ............................................................................................. 3
CYMCAP graphical user interface ................................................................... 3
The CYMCAP libraries and utilities – an overview .......................................... 4
Populating the CYMCAP libraries .................................................................... 6
What you should know about running studies with CYMCAP ...................................... 7

2 – The Cable Library ............................................................................................................... 9


Introduction ................................................................................................................... 9
Cable data in studies ....................................................................................... 9
Cable library Navigator window .................................................................................. 10
Cable library window commands ................................................................... 10
Cable library pop-up menu............................................................................. 12
Cable design data window elements .......................................................................... 13
Steps to create a new cable........................................................................................ 15
Cable components, materials and construction .......................................................... 16
Conductor data .............................................................................................. 17
Conductor material............................................................................ 18
Conductor construction ..................................................................... 18
Drying and impregnation ................................................................... 19
Conductor shield data .................................................................................... 20
Insulation data ................................................................................................ 21
Dielectric loss factors for insulating materials ................................... 21
Insulation screen ............................................................................................ 22
Sheath ............................................................................................................ 23
Sheath reinforcing material ............................................................................ 23

Contents  iii
CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Skid wires (for pipe type cables only) ............................................................ 24


Concentric neutral wires ................................................................................ 24
Jacket around each core (SL-type cables only)............................................. 25
Armour/Reinforcing tape ................................................................................ 26
Armour bedding/Armour serving .................................................................... 27
Jacket, oversheath and pipe coating material ............................................... 28
Creating a new cable - Example ................................................................................. 28
Useful considerations .................................................................................................. 34
Cable layers ................................................................................................... 34
Particular modeling ........................................................................................ 34
SL-type cables ............................................................................................... 35
Custom materials and thermal capacitances ................................................. 35
Filter Editor .................................................................................................................. 36

3 – The Ductbank Library ...................................................................................................... 39


Introduction ................................................................................................................. 39
Ductbank library management .................................................................................... 39
Creating a new duct bank. An illustrative example. ....................................... 40

4 – Load-Curves/Heat Source Curves and Shape Libraries .............................................. 43


Introduction ................................................................................................................. 43
Curves and shapes ........................................................................................ 43
Shape Library Management........................................................................................ 44
Creating a new shape – An Illustrative example............................................ 45
Shifting a shape – An illustrative example ..................................................... 47
Load and Heat Source Libraries Management ........................................................... 48
Expanding and collapsing the curves ............................................................ 50
Curves libraries command buttons ................................................................ 51
Create a Load Curve using existing shapes – An illustrative example .......... 52
Load Curve from field-recorded data or an Excel file .................................... 57

5 – Steady State Thermal Analysis....................................................................................... 61


General ....................................................................................................................... 61
Methodology and computational standards ................................................................ 61
Accuracy of CYMCAP and References ...................................................................... 63
References ..................................................................................................... 64

iv  Contents
CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Studies and executions ............................................................................................... 65


Library of studies and executions ............................................................................... 66
Study library pop-up menu ............................................................................. 68
Creating a study .......................................................................................................... 72
Analysis options .......................................................................................................... 74
Steady state analysis .................................................................................................. 75
General data for the installation ..................................................................... 76
Ambient temperature and soil resistivity ........................................... 76
Non isothermal earth surface modeling ............................................ 76
Moisture migration modeling ............................................................. 77
Surrounding medium of the installation ............................................ 77
Multiple cables per phase ................................................................. 82
Cable Installation data ................................................................................... 83
Geometrical configuration of the installation ..................................... 83
Additional salient aspects of Cable Installation Data ........................ 83
Cable Installation types ..................................................................... 84
Specific cable installation data ....................................................................... 84
Bonding ............................................................................................. 84
Barring certain bonding options ........................................................ 86
Cables touching ................................................................................ 87
Cable transposition ........................................................................... 87
Duct bank/duct materials and construction ....................................... 87
Induced currents in metallic layers as a fraction of conductor
currents for single phase circuit ........................................................ 88
Pipe material and dimensions ........................................................... 88
Cable Library data and executions ............................................................................. 89
Steady state thermal analysis, Example 1: Cables in a duct bank ............................. 90
Defining a new study and a new execution ................................................... 91
Setting the steady state analysis solution Option .......................................... 92
Execution bar and associated command buttons .......................................... 93
Defining standard and/or non-standard duct banks ....................................... 95
Importing a duct bank from the Library .......................................................... 96
Defining the general installation data and setup ............................................ 97
Defining the cable installation data ................................................................ 98

Contents  v
CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Rearranging the cables in the proper ducts ................................................. 100


Rapidly change installation data information through data grid ................... 101
A study case for dissimilar directly buried cables ..................................................... 102
Define a new execution using an existing one as template ......................... 102
Define a new execution starting from scratch .............................................. 103
Modify the solution option from the CYMCAP menu ................................... 103
Enter a group of cables using absolute coordinates .................................... 105
Enter a trefoil formation using relative coordinates...................................... 106
Specify a “fixed ampacity circuit” ................................................................. 107
Specify a heat source included in the installation ........................................ 108
Specific installation data ........................................................................................... 109
Results reporting ....................................................................................................... 110
Steady-state results labels ........................................................................................ 110
View/hide labels ........................................................................................... 111
Label grid editor ........................................................................................... 112
Select/move/align labels .............................................................................. 113
Change the connection line between the cable and its associated
label.............................................................................................................. 114
Change the properties of a label .................................................................. 115
Customize information to display in the label .............................................. 116
Reset all labels to their default positions ..................................................... 119
Keep all labels positions permanently ......................................................... 120
Viewing the graphical ampacity reports by mouse selection .................................... 120
Steady-State report ................................................................................................... 122
Excel report ............................................................................................................... 122
The Electrical Tab ........................................................................................ 124
Opening more than one executions simultaneously ................................................. 128
Working with more than one executions simultaneously .......................................... 131
Submitting more than one executions simultaneously ................................ 131

6 – Transient Analysis ......................................................................................................... 133


General ..................................................................................................................... 133
Preliminary considerations ........................................................................................ 133
Transient analysis options ........................................................................................ 134
Solve for Ampacity given Time and Temperature........................................ 134

vi  Contents
CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Solve for Temperature given Time and Ampacity........................................ 135


Solve for Time given Ampacity and Temperature........................................ 136
Temperature as a function of Ampacity ....................................................... 137
Ampacity as a function of Time .................................................................... 138
Temperature as a function of Time .............................................................. 139
How to proceed for a transient analysis .................................................................... 139
Informing CYMCAP that a transient analysis is to be performed ............................. 140
Example and Illustrations .......................................................................................... 141
Case description and illustrations ................................................................ 141
Specify the transient analysis option ........................................................... 141
Specify the data for the transient analysis option ........................................ 142
Assign loads to cables ................................................................................. 142
Submit the simulation................................................................................... 144
Generate the reports .................................................................................... 145
Change the color of the curves for the transient reports ............................. 147
Observe the transients results ..................................................................... 148

7 – Approximate Temperature Field ................................................................................... 149


Introduction ............................................................................................................... 149
Scopes and limitations .............................................................................................. 150
Customizing the isotherms........................................................................................ 151
Automatic design of backfills/duct banks .................................................................. 153

8 – The Sensitivity Analysis Option of CYMCAP .............................................................. 157

9– Useful Toolbox for the Designer ................................................................................... 161


Show the installation drag & drop toolbox ................................................................ 161
Rapidly add a cable(s) to an installation ................................................................... 162
Switch to another category of symbols ..................................................................... 164
Description of symbols per category ......................................................................... 164
Cables .......................................................................................................... 164
Heat Sources ............................................................................................... 165
Ductbanks (working for MDB only) .............................................................. 165
Jobs template ............................................................................................... 166
Casings (working for Multiple casings only)................................................. 166
Load curves (working with Transient Analysis activated only) .................... 166

Contents  vii
CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Add a new backfill to the MDB installation using the toolbox ................................... 167
Assign a load curve to cable(s) in the installation using the toolbox ........................ 167

10 – The CYMCAP Menu ...................................................................................................... 171


Overview of the CYMCAP Menu............................................................................... 171
The File menu ........................................................................................................... 171
The Window menu .................................................................................................... 172
By default, executions are displayed in Cascade.The CYMCAP menu for
opened executions .................................................................................................... 173
The File menu - Execution ........................................................................................ 173
The Edit menu - Execution........................................................................................ 174
The View menu - Execution ...................................................................................... 174
The Options menu - Execution ................................................................................. 175
Customize installation defaults on creation ................................................. 179
For General Ratings........................................................................ 179
For Backfill ...................................................................................... 180
For Ductbank .................................................................................. 180
For Duct .......................................................................................... 181
For Trough ...................................................................................... 181
For Casing ...................................................................................... 182
For Duct in Casing .......................................................................... 182
Simulation control parameters ..................................................................... 183
IEC scope extended..................................................................................... 184
Designate the system of units for the session .......................................................... 186
Designate the AC system frequency for the session ................................................ 186
Designate AC conductor resistance values .............................................................. 186

11 – CYMCAP Utilities ......................................................................................................... 187


Introduction ............................................................................................................... 187
Designate the working directory for CYMCAP .......................................................... 187
Backup the contents of the working directory to another directory ........................... 188
Append a database to another database .................................................................. 188
Tag specific items from the Libraries ........................................................................ 188
Copy selected items to a given data base ................................................................ 190

12 – Defaults for Various Types of Cables ........................................................................ 193

viii  Contents
CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Defaults – Overview .................................................................................................. 193

13 – Introduction – Additional Modules ............................................................................. 195

14 – The Multiple Duct Banks Module................................................................................ 197


Introduction ............................................................................................................... 197
Creating a Standard Multiple Duct Bank ................................................................... 198
Creating a multiple duct bank ...................................................................... 199
Installing duct banks .................................................................................... 202
Installing backfills or soil layers .................................................................... 205
Complete duct bank data ............................................................................. 209
Completing backfill data ............................................................................... 211
Installation of cables .................................................................................... 212
Complete the specific installation data ........................................................ 214
How to move location of linear dimensions of any layer .............................. 216
How to hide linear dimensions of any layer ................................................. 218
Save and start the simulation....................................................................... 220
Creating a Non-Standard Multiple Duct Bank ........................................................... 221
Building the installation ................................................................................ 222
Installing non-standard duct banks .............................................................. 223
Complete non-standard duct bank data....................................................... 224
Installation of cables .................................................................................... 225
Complete the specific installation data ........................................................ 227
Automatic installation of backfills ................................................................. 228
Creating a new job template ..................................................................................... 233
Edit and save a template as a new one ....................................................... 236
How to insert a job template into a MDB installation ................................................ 237

15 – The Cables in Tunnels Module ................................................................................... 241


Introduction ............................................................................................................... 241
Summary of module features ....................................................................... 241
Basic Operation ........................................................................................... 241
Theoretical Background ............................................................................... 242
Unventilated Tunnels ...................................................................... 242
Ventilated Tunnels .......................................................................... 243
Creating a Study for Cables in Tunnels .................................................................... 243

Contents  ix
CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Unventilated Tunnels ................................................................................... 243


Creating a New Study ..................................................................... 243
Adding more trays and circuits to an execution .............................. 249
Permutable Trefoils ......................................................................... 252
Ventilated Tunnel to Unventilated Tunnel Conversion ................... 253
Ventilated Tunnels ....................................................................................... 259
Creating a Study from Scratch ........................................................ 259
Unventilated Tunnel to Ventilated Tunnel Conversion ................... 266
Tunnel Shape Display ............................................................................................... 267
Validation ..................................................................................................... 268

16 – The Cables in Troughs Module................................................................................... 271


Introduction ............................................................................................................... 271
Theoretical background for filled troughs ..................................................... 271
Theoretical background for unfilled troughs................................................. 273
Basic Use ..................................................................................................... 273
Creating a Study for Cables in Filled Troughs .......................................................... 274
Moving the trough down............................................................................... 278
Asymmetrical troughs .................................................................................. 279
Creating a Study for Cables in Unfilled Troughs....................................................... 280

17 – The Multiple Casings Module ..................................................................................... 285


Introduction ............................................................................................................... 285
Creating a Multiple Casing installation ...................................................................... 286
Creating a multiple casing study .................................................................. 287
Installing casings .......................................................................................... 290
Installing ducts ............................................................................................. 293
Installation of cables .................................................................................... 295
Complete the specific installation data ........................................................ 300
Save and start the simulation....................................................................... 300

18 – The Duct Bank Optimizer Module............................................................................... 303


Introduction ............................................................................................................... 303
An illustrative example of the Duct Bank Optimizer .................................................. 304
Invoking the Optimizer ................................................................................. 304
Configuring the Optimizer ............................................................................ 305

x  Contents
CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Running the Optimizer ................................................................................. 306


Viewing the results of the Optimizer ............................................................ 307

19 – The Short Circuit Cable Rating Module ..................................................................... 309


Introduction ............................................................................................................... 309
Running the SCR module ......................................................................................... 310
Short circuit rating calculations ................................................................................. 310
Pipe-type cables parameters ....................................................................... 312
Calculating the final temperature ................................................................. 313
Saving your parameters ............................................................................... 313
Default short circuit final temperature values............................................................ 314
Cable damage curve calculation ............................................................................... 315
Basic operations .......................................................................................... 315
Cable damage curve results ........................................................................ 316
Export cable damage curve to CYMTCC import file .................................... 317
Import CSV file with CYMTCC application ................................................... 318
Basic operations ............................................................................. 318
Cable damage curve displayed on time current plot ...................... 319

20 – The Magnetic Fields Module ....................................................................................... 321


Introduction ............................................................................................................... 321
Modeling Assumptions ................................................................................. 321
Theoretical Background ............................................................................... 322
Basic Operation ........................................................................................... 323
Computing the Magnetic Flux Density ...................................................................... 323
Changing the Plotting Parameters ............................................................................ 326
Reporting................................................................................................................... 328

21 – The Cables Crossing Module...................................................................................... 329


Introduction ............................................................................................................... 329
Creating a cable crossings installation ..................................................................... 330
Creating a cables crossing installation ........................................................ 331
Installing cables ........................................................................................... 334
Complete the specific installation data ........................................................ 338
Save and start the simulation....................................................................... 339

Contents  xi
CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

22 – The Cables Impedance Calculation Module .............................................................. 341


Introduction ............................................................................................................... 341
Summary of features.................................................................................... 342
How to generate the impedance calculation report .................................................. 343
Impedance report ...................................................................................................... 346
R Primitive and X Primitive matrices ............................................................ 346
R Bonding and X Bonding matrices ............................................................. 347
R Phase and X Phase matrices ................................................................... 348
R Circuit and X Circuit matrices ................................................................... 348
R Sequence and X Sequence matrices ....................................................... 349
R Sequence/R1 and X Sequence/R1 matrices............................................ 349
Symmetrical components matrix .................................................................. 350
Admittance report ...................................................................................................... 350
Y Primitive, Y Circuit and Y Sequence matrices .......................................... 350
Concentric neutral cables ......................................................................................... 351
Extruded dielectric cables ......................................................................................... 353
Low pressure oil filled cables (Type 3) ..................................................................... 354
High pressure oil (gas) filled cables .......................................................................... 356
Sheath related defaults ............................................................................................. 358
Armour related defaults............................................................................................. 359
Three core cables ........................................................................................ 360

23 – The Soil Dry-Out Prevention Module ......................................................................... 361


Introduction ............................................................................................................... 361
An illustrative example of the Dry-Out Prevention computation ............................... 362

24 – The Parametric Study Module .................................................................................... 365


Introduction ............................................................................................................... 365
Scope ........................................................................................................................ 365
Example of parametric study .................................................................................... 367
Invoking CYMCAP Parametric Study module.............................................. 368
Buttons on the window .................................................................... 369
Building a scenario ....................................................................................... 369
Viewing the results of the parametric study ................................................. 373
Simulations tab ............................................................................... 373

xii  Contents
CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Graphs tab ...................................................................................... 375

Index ...................................................................................................................................... 377

Contents  xiii
CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

1 – Getting Started

Overview of CYMCAP
The determination of the maximum current that a cable can sustain without deterioration of any of its electrical
and/or mechanical properties has always been of prime interest to engineers and constitutes an important
design parameter for both system planning and operations.
Accurate ampacity studies help to maximize the benefits from the considerable capital investment associated
with cable installations. Also they help to increase system reliability and the proper utilization of the installed
equipment.
CYMCAP is a Windows-based software designed to perform thermal analyses. It addresses both steady state
and transient thermal cable rating. These thermal analyses pertain to temperature rise and/or ampacity
calculations using the analytical techniques described by Neher-McGrath and the IEC 60287© and IEC
60853© International standards. More details on the implemented methods and the validation made to
CYMCAP can be found in the section Methodology and computational standards.
CYMCAP features additional optional installation and analysis modules, the capabilities of which are covered
in a separate manual. The modules are:
Installation add-on modules:
 The Multiple Duct Banks module (MDB) to determine the steady state ampacity of cables laid in an
environment of non-uniform resistivity as is the case in presence of several duct banks and/or backfills. .
 The Cables in Tunnels module to determine the temperature and steady state, cyclic and transient
ampacity of cables installed in unventilated tunnels.
 The Cable in Troughs module to determine the thermal rating of cables installed in filled and unfilled
troughs. For filled troughs, it is possible to compute the temperature and steady state unequally loaded
ampacity. Cyclic loading is considered through the use of load factors. For unfilled and unventilated
troughs, the module can compute the equally loaded ampacity or temperature when the cables are
equally loaded and no load factors are permitted.
 The Multiple Casings module (MCAS) to determine the steady state unequally loaded ampacity and/or
temperature of cables installed in non-magnetic casing.
Analysis add-on modules:
 The Duct Bank Optimizer module (OPT) to determine the placement of several circuits within a duct
bank so that certain optimal criteria are fulfilled.
 The Short Circuit Cable Rating module (SCR) dedicated to the calculation of the adiabatic and non-
adiabatic short-circuit ratings.
 The Magnetic Fields module (EMF). Once an ampacity or a temperature run has been performed, the
module computes the magnetic flux density at any point on or above the ground for an underground cable
installation using the current computed or specified in the steady state simulation.

1 – Getting Started  1
CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

 The Cable Crossing module (XING) that allows the user to determine the steady state ampacity of
circuits crossing each other.
 The Cables Impedance Calculation module (ZMAT) that determines the cables electrical parameters
necessary for performing network studies at the power frequency (50/60 Hz).
 The Soil Dry Out Prevention module available only with the MDB installation module. It allows to rate
the installation based on a temperature constraint at the duct bank/backfill boundary with the native soil
such that the original soil content cannot exceed the moisture migration temperature limit.

Computer System requirements


CYMCAP is a 32-bit application, requires a computer using Microsoft Windows® 7 or 8 or 8.1 or using
Microsoft Server 2008.
The minimum hardware requirements are:
 An Intel I5-based computer
 A minimum of 2 GB of RAM
 1 GB hard disk space

Note: A version of Microsoft Office must be installed on your computer for the generation of
reports (Excel).

Installing CYMCAP for Windows


CYMCAP can be downloaded from our user portal at https://my.cyme.com/. A password is needed for the
application to be unpacked and installed. To obtain the proper password please contact CYME
International. Run the installation package. The package includes the software and License Manager, which
is a tool for the management of available module licenses that enable the software to run.

Windows settings
For CYMCAP to function properly, you need to insure that you have the following settings on your machine:
 Screen resolution: CYMCAP needs that the screen resolution settings to be at least 800 x 600 pixels.
The screen should be configured for Small (or Normal) Fonts size with a maximum of 96 dpi. Otherwise,
some of the CYMCAP command buttons might not show.
 Regional settings: You need to use the Decimal Point. To set this, access your Windows start menu
(“Start”), select Control Panel, then Regional and Language Options (this can also be named
Regional Options on your computer).
1. Click the Number tab. In this window insure that:
‘.’ is used as the Decimal Symbol. Click Apply and then OK.
2. Click the Currency tab. In this window as well insure that:
‘.’ is used as the Decimal Symbol. Click Apply and then OK.
3. When you get back to the main Regional Options window, click OK to close the
window.

2  1 – Getting Started
CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

The contents of CYMCAP


CYMCAP is equipped with calculation engines to perform Steady State, Cyclic and Transient analyses.
These simulation programs produce the results and generate tabular and graphical reports.
Data for the steady state and transient simulators is provided through a Graphical User Interface (GUI)
supported by the CYMCAP application libraries. These Libraries are the Study Library, the Cable Library,
the Ductbank Library, the Shape Library, the Heat Source Library and the Load Curves Library.
The Study library serves to store and keep organized the different ampacity/temperature scenarios and
specific data for the installation. This library has been specially designed to facilitate the study of “what if
scenarios”. The Cable library is needed in all computations since it contains the details of the cable(s)
construction. The Load Curves library and the Shape library are essential for transient thermal analysis.
Similarly, the Ductbank library is needed for installations featuring duct banks and the Heat source Library is
needed when the installation contains an external heat source in a transient thermal analysis.

CYMCAP graphical user interface


When you open CYMCAP, the program’s main working window will be displayed with the CYMCAP
Navigator overlaid on it. The description of the commands and use of the main window is described in the
next subsections
The CYMCAP GUI Navigator provides access to the various libraries and to the Utilities window. The
Navigator closes when you open a Study. You can re-display it by selecting the File > Open Navigator menu

item in the main window, by pressing the F3 key or by clicking on the icon
Each of the library windows is the subject of a separate chapter, starting at Chapter 2.

1 – Getting Started  3
CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

The CYMCAP libraries and utilities – an overview


Access to all CYMCAP libraries is independent, modular and does not rely on any predetermined sequence.
The CYMCAP libraries and, therefore, all the application activities ranging from data management to actual
simulation runs, are accessed through the CYMCAP Navigator.

Study Library This library contains all the studies performed by the application. CYMCAP relies on the
concepts of "studies" and "executions" to organize study cases. A "study" can be
viewed as a stand-alone scenario for thermal cable analysis, with several simulation
alternatives (“what if scenarios”), named “executions”. A study normally pertains to a
given installation exhibiting salient characteristics for the cable installation or the
ambient conditions. Within a "study" you can define many "executions". An "execution"
is used to describe a variant of the base case. See section Library of studies and
executions.
Cable Library The Cable library is a database containing the detailed construction of various types of
cables. The contents of the Cable library are used for both steady state and transient
analyses. The Cable library, apart from being a database containing the various cable
types, is equipped with a module that permits the definition of the cables themselves.
Fairly detailed data is required to describe a cable, because the models used for the
thermal representation of the cable rely heavily on the exact cable construction. This
data is as essential, as the data describing the cable layout and the installation
operating conditions.

4  1 – Getting Started
CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

CYMCAP offers the possibility to provide default cable dimensions based on generic
cable construction characteristics, once the materials of the various cable components
are defined. This facility is useful for preliminary cable studies but should not be
interpreted as addressing all possible manufacturing practices. Chapter 2 is
dedicated to describing the Cable library and its various functions, while the used
default values for the cable components are given in Chapter 12.
Ductbank The Ductbank library is a database containing the construction details of standard duct
Library banks. A duct bank is a pre-constructed block containing several cable conduits. The
purpose of the Duct bank library is to define the geometrical characteristics of these
duct banks by specifying the total length, width, conduit number, duct spacing and
specific duct diameter so that the information can be used as an integral part of any
study for cables installed in duct banks.
The contents of the Ductbank library are used for both steady state and transient
analyses. Duct bank geometrical characteristics are crucial in determining external
thermal resistances. The Duct bank library, in addition from being a database containing
the various duct bank types, is equipped with a module that permits the specification of
new duct banks. Chapter 3 is dedicated to describing the Ductbank library and its
various functions and facilities.
Heat Source The Heat Source library is a database containing the transient thermal characteristics of
Library external heat sources that may be present within a cable installation layout. External
heat sources are deemed third party bodies that either emit or absorb heat depending
on their temperature with reference to the ambient environment temperature. The heat
source library contains the heat source curves that display the temporal variations of the
heat source. Typical examples of heat sources are steam pipes and/or water pipes
which temperature can vary as a function of time.
The Heat Source library is supported by another library, the Shape library and is
used exclusively for transient thermal analyses. It is often important to include the
presence of heat sources in the simulation, since heat sources alter considerably the
temperature rise of the cables in an installation. The Heat Source library, apart from
being a database, is equipped with a module that permits the definition of new heat
source characteristics. In Chapter 4 we describe the Heat Source library and its various
functions and facilities.
Load Curves The Load Curves library is a database containing the description of the various patterns
library that the cable currents may exhibit as a function of time.
The Load Curves library is used exclusively for transient analysis and is
supported by another library, the Shape library. The Load Curves library, apart from
being a database, is equipped with a module that permits the construction of the Load
Curves themselves. Load curve data is crucial for transient analysis. Load curves are
defined in p.u. within the Load Curves library. The Load curve description does not
contain actual ampere levels information. The “ampere-based” Load curves are
interpreted during run time as the steady state value of the currents determined for the
cables from the steady state thermal analysis. The description of the Load Curves
library and its various functions are given in Chapter 4.

1 – Getting Started  5
CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Shape Library The Shape library is not a stand-alone library. Instead, it is an auxiliary library dedicated
to containing the building blocks for the entries of the “Heat Source” and the ”Load
Curves” libraries. By definition, shapes are defined on a 24-hour basis and represent
daily temporal variation patterns. Different shapes can be concatenated to produce
temporal profile variations of several days.
Since, however, heat source shapes can only be invoked from the Heat Source library
and load curves shapes can only be invoked from the “Load Curves” Library, there is no
risk of confusion. It is essential to enter the required shapes in the Shape library
first and then built the Heat Source curves/Load curves to be used for transient
analysis. The Shape library, apart from being a database, is equipped with a module
that permits the construction of new shapes as well.
Shapes are expressed in p.u. in order to give greater flexibility in describing heat flux
levels for the heat sources and ampere loading levels for the load curves. The same
entry format is used to describe both “Heat source” shapes and “load curve” shapes.
See also Shape Library Management main functions.
It is emphasized again that all p.u. values entered in shapes and Load
Curves/Heat Source Curves are expressed in p.u of the values these quantities
assumed during steady state thermal analysis.
The CYMCAP Utilities are also accessible from the Navigator. The Utilities are used to manage the data
files to help the user keep projects organized in folders and subfolders or to perform data exchanges between
users and computers. The CYMCAP Utilities are fully described in Chapter 11.

Populating the CYMCAP libraries


With the exception of the Study library, the CYMCAP libraries need to be populated before the application
models any cable installation. Although typical entries are provided for most input data, it is mandatory; and it
is the user’s responsibility to populate them with figures reflecting actual data. No supplied entry in the
application libraries should be interpreted as being “typical” in any way.
To get accurate cable construction data, the CYMCAP user should contact the cable manufacturer providing
the cables for the installation. The more detailed the information, the closer to reality the simulation would be.
Dimensions for duct bank, backfills and burial depth should be available from the construction blueprints.
Daily and weekly load curves should be available from the electrical system operator.

6  1 – Getting Started
CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

What you should know about running studies with


CYMCAP
The end result of using CYMCAP is to obtain temperatures and currents for the various cables contained in a
given cable installation, operating under certain conditions. The following is a typical sequence of steps that
are followed when using CYMCAP as an analysis tool.
1. Make sure that ALL the cables of the installation you are about to study are well defined
construction-wise and dimension-wise. If this is not the case, try to obtain as much information as
possible from the cable manufacturer.
2. Make sure that ALL the cable types that the simulation will use are entered in the CYMCAP Cable
Library.
3. Make sure that the duct bank (if any) that the installation employs is entered in the Ductbank
library. If the installation does not feature a duct bank, there is no need to populate the Ductbank library.
4. Make sure that the geometrical data of the installation you are about to study as well as the
necessary simulation parameters (pipe dimensions, solar radiation intensities, bonding
characteristics, ambient temperatures, thermal resistivities, etc.) are available and well defined.
Use the graphical User Interface of CYMCAP to define the installation in detail.
5. Make certain that you clearly specify the type of analysis option you wish to perform. The options
are:
a) For steady state analyses: equally loaded, unequally loaded or temperature.
b) For transient analyses there are three variables in play: temperature, time and current. The user
needs to enter two of them and CYMCAP will compute the third one.
Once you have finished entering the installation data for the particular study case, save and submit
the study case(s).
6. Make certain that cables frequencies are the one desired and that the Unit system you prefer to
work with has been properly set. Ampacities calculated at 50 Hz are not the same as for 60 Hz.
Furthermore, working with the metric or imperial system of units can be convenient depending how the
installation and/or cable data were initially provided.
7. Before initiating a transient study, make sure that you have specified loads to all the cables in the
installation by assigning to every one of them an appropriate load curve from the library of load
curves. You cannot assign a load curve that has not been first defined in the library. It is therefore
necessary to first define the load curves you wish to use and include them in the load curve library. In
order to do that, use the Load Curve library manager
8. Examine the simulation results by using the extensive tabular and graphical reports facilities offered by
CYMCAP.

1 – Getting Started  7
CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

2 – The Cable Library

Introduction
This chapter describes how to enter new cables in the library and how to manage an existing library of cables.
Keeping the cable library up to date with accurate data is extremely important because the results of the
ampacity/temperature simulations depend substantially on this data. The cable construction information
is one of the major functions of CYMCAP. Access to the Cable library allows you not only to add new cable
models, but to modify and delete previously entered cables.

Cable data in studies


The cable library contains the cable data that comprises the detailed construction of the various power cables,
material and dimensions. Direct access to the cable library allows the user to use one or more cables, within a
given execution, for steady state and transient studies.
Note that it is possible to modify the data of a given cable within a particular simulation scenario (execution, or
study) without updating the Cable library. This is possible because CYMCAP keeps a copy of the cable
from the library within the execution (see also Chapter 5). The information related to cable data within a
given execution, is used in the simulations. The program allows the user to transfer cable data from the
cable library to the execution in question and vice versa. Unless particular reasons prevail, it is always
advisable to harmonize the data in the cable library with the actual data used in the various executions.
Thus, when you have worked on a study and want to save your execution, you will be prompted to specify
what you want to do with the modified cable data for that execution, as follows:

Save as is To keep the new information only in the execution without affecting the data
in the cable library.
Save as is (update To restore the cable information in the execution from the information in the
from cable library) cable library, and save the execution with the restored cable information.
Save as is (update to To save your execution with the new cable data and update the cable
cable library) library using the cable information in the execution at the time of saving.

Note: Updating or changing data in the cable library does not update the information in
previously saved executions.

2 – The Cable Library  9


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Cable library Navigator window


The Cable library is accessed through the CYMCAP Navigator. The Navigator window is shown below. Click
on the Cable tab to display the list of all the cables in the library.

A unique ID and a title identify each cable in the Cable Type Library list. The ID appears in brackets to the
left of the cable title.

Note: It is highly recommended to enter a unique cable title for each cable.

A symbol is displayed on the left of the list entry to indicate whether the cable is a single-core, a three-core, or
a pipe-type cable. See the examples below.

Single-core

Three-core

Pipe-type
When you select a cable in the Cable Type Library list, the corresponding cable cross-section is displayed at
the bottom of the window. Move the Up and Down arrow keyboard keys to browse through the library list.
With this cable library browser capability, CYMCAP allows the user to view the salient aspects of the
cable constructions without resorting to detailed editing.

Cable library window commands


New To ADD a cable to the Cable Library, click on any cable title and then on the New button.
You can either use a template or create a new cable from scratch. If you choose the
template option, the highlighted cable will be used as a template.

10  2 – The Cable Library


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Edit To MODIFY a cable, click on the cable of interest and then on the Edit button. Double-
clicking on the cable of interest can accomplish the same task.
Delete To DELETE a cable, click on the cable of interest and then on the Delete button.
Delete Tagged This feature is used to delete more than one cable at a time. The Tag mode needs to be
turned on first. This is done through the CYMCAP Utilities tab. The procedure of multiple
selection is described in section Tag specific items from the Libraries.
Filter Editor The Filter Editor command helps the user to build filters to quickly locate a cable using
particular characteristics. This feature is most useful when the cable library contains a
large number of cables. See section Filter Editor.

Apply Filter This button gives direct access to the application of filters previously built in the Filter
Editor. When you click on the Apply Filter button, a combo box will appear at the
bottom of the CYMCAP window to let you select your pre-defined filter.

2 – The Cable Library  11


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Cable library pop-up menu


When you right-click on the Cable library window, the following pop-up menu will appear.

Search Utility Primary filter that permits the selective display of the major cable types. With this
utility, the search can be narrowed down to single-core, three-core or pipe-type
cables.

View All Selecting this option will list all cables in the Cable Type Library list.
View Pipe-Type To show pipe-type cables only in the Cable Type Library list.
View Single-Core To show single-core cables only in the Cable Type Library list.
View Three-Core To show three-core cables only in the Cable Type Library list.
View Tagged This is used to view the cables that are “Tagged”. The Tag mode needs to be turned
Only on first. This is done through the CYMCAP Utilities tab. The procedure of multiple
selection is described in section Tag specific items from the Libraries..
View through a This is an information field that indicates whether or not the cable type list is currently
Filter being viewed through a filter.
Sort by Cable Id Sorts the displayed cables by cable ID.

12  2 – The Cable Library


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Sort by Cable Sorts the displayed cables by cable title.


Title
Resynchronize This function operates only in multi-user network licenses. It serves to refresh the list
of cables.
Tag/UnTag To select (tag) or unselect (remove tag) a cable. Active when the Tag mode has been
enabled See section: Tag specific items from the Libraries.
Tag All To select all cables in the view. Active when the Tag mode has been enabled. See
section: Tag specific items from the Libraries.
Untag All To unselect all cables. Active when the Tag mode has been enabled. See section:
Tag specific items from the Libraries.

Cable design data window elements


The Cable design data window is composed of two basic parts.
The top part provides a summary of the library item you are looking at, and the bottom part shows the cross-
section of the selected cable identifying each layer and displaying its associated data.
The top part summary includes:

List of Drop-down list of the available cables. The cable appearing in the field is the one for which
Cables the data is currently displayed.
Number of
Conductors One for single core cables , and three for three core cables
No other options are supported.
Cable Type CYMCAP supports six cable types. Five of these “types” are conceptual and are only used
by the application to assign default dimensions to the cable components. The sixth one,
“Combined Sheath”, is used to model cables with their sheath external to the concentric
neutrals layer (which is commonly used in Europe).
The cable type is defined in the first stages of cable definition (see example below) and
they are as follows:
 PIPE TYPE cables
 LPOF cables
 CONCENTRIC NEUTRAL cables
 EXTRUDED cables
 OTHER (reserved for cables that cannot be directly classified to any of the above
categories).
 COMBINED SHEATH

2 – The Cable Library  13


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Cable A menu appears below the summary of the displayed cable listing the available
components components for the selected cable type; it identifies components which are currently used
menu
with a .
When you click on the components’ buttons, you toggle between Yes and No to display
and hide the layer in question. When you enable a component for which the database does
not contain associated data, the list of layers in the bottom part of the window will show you
where data needs to be entered with red ellipses, or with the word “unknown”.
When a layer is not available for the cable type selected, the toggle button for that layer will

show a lock .
Notes:
 There are no default dimensions available for cable types “OTHER” and “COMBINED
SHEATH”.
 There are no restrictions on the availability of components for the cable type “OTHER”.
Note that some restrictions do apply for the remaining types.
 Pipe type cables can only be modeled under the “PIPE TYPE (TRIANGULAR)” and
“PIPE TYPE (CRADLED)” construction type.
 The component availability restrictions are seen in the data entry dialog boxes as
“locks” not allowing the user to select a particular component construction depending
on the remaining data entered so far. These restrictions are not meant to be rigid and
they simply reflect one philosophy of manufacturing practice from the very many
available.
 In the COMBINED SHEATH type the Sheath/Sheath Reinforcement layers appear on
the outside of the Concentric Neutral layer.

This button gives access to the Short Circuit Ratings (SCR) add-on module of CYMCAP.
The cable needs to be completed and saved before this option can be used.

14  2 – The Cable Library


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

The bottom part of the window shows the cross-section of the selected cable identifying each layer and
displaying its associated data. The name of each layer appears as a hyperlink with the basic layer data listed
besides the layer’s name. If this information doesn’t appear, select the View > Details menu item. When a
layer is not colored (i.e. only outlined in black), it means that extra data need to be entered.
In order to access the detailed data dialog box for a specific layer, simply click on the layer’s name hyperlink
in the list next to the cable cross-section.
In the bottom left corner of the window the following information appear:

Voltage Cable rated voltage: This is the voltage used to calculate the dielectric losses in the
cable. This voltage should be the rated line-to-line voltage of the installation. Even if
the cable is used in a single-phase circuit arrangement the hypothetical line-to-line voltage
needs to be entered.
Cond. Area Conductor cross-sectional area: This is the nominal conductor area and should be
entered as such. This area is interpreted by the application to be the "effective" conductor
area and this is the value that will be used by the program for resistance calculations. The
user has access to standard conductor sizes ordered in increasing sizes of wire.
Conductor sizes can either be selected from the list or entered manually.

Steps to create a new cable


The necessary steps to create a new cable and save it in the cable library are summarized below. An
example applying those steps is the subject of section Creating a new cable - Example.
Step 1: Identify the layers and cable components and decide how they are to be modeled, according
to the component availability CYMCAP offers. The component availability is listed starting at
section Cable components, materials and construction.
Step 2: Identify the cable components and define the materials they are made of. In case the program
does not support a material for a given component, make certain that the necessary constants are
available so that you can enter it as “custom”.
Step 3: Identify the cable components dimensions and make certain that every layer thickness is
well identified. CYMCAP relies on layer thickness to conjecture equivalent layer diameters for both
single core and three-core cables of all constructions. Furthermore, make certain that accurate data
concerning length of lay for concentric wires armour and tapes are also available. These data are
important to correctly estimate loss factors in 2-point bonded systems. It is always useful to
ascertain that the cable construction dimensions are available from the manufacturer. The
more the cable construction details are known, the less one has to rely on the default dimensions
provided by the program.
Step 4: Select the system of Units for the session. Both Imperial and Metric systems are supported by
CYMCAP. The cable dimensions can be entered in either inches (Imperial system) or mm (Metric).
Once the cable dimensions are entered in any system they can be visualized in the other system by

simply switching the Unit system by clicking on the or icon.


Step 5: Enter the cable components and dimensions for the cable (see Cable components, materials
and construction).

2 – The Cable Library  15


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Step 6: SAVE the newly entered cable data. Menu command File > Save or File > Save As. You can

also save by clicking on .


Step 7: Display a new listing of the library of cables in the Navigator (F3) and make sure that the newly
entered cable appears on the list.

Cable components, materials and construction


When a cable is entered in the library, the user has considerable flexibility in specifying both the available
cable components as well as the materials these components are made of. In the paragraphs that follow, the
cable components supported are outlined along with the parameters the program will use internally as a
function of the component construction. Parameters and/or constants used by the application follow the ones
in IEC 60287-1-1.
To have access to a layer dialog box to enter/edit the related data, you simply click on its name in the Cable
Design Data window. The related dialog box will be displayed to the left of the screen. The top part of each
specific Data dialog boxes feature a Layers navigator that you use to display the data dialog box associated
with another layer. Below is an illustration of how the layers’ names are displayed in the Layers drop down
list.
Means that this layer is part of the cable selected.
This layer is available for the cable selected with the
configuration defined in the database, but is not part
of the current cable.
This layer is not available for the cable selected with
configuration defined.

Sample: more or fewer layers in different positions might


appear depending on type of cable selected.

Data dialog boxes are available for the following types of layers. Each are discussed in separate subsection in
this chapter.
 Conductor
 Conductor shield
 Insulation
 Insulation screen
 Sheath
 Sheath reinforcing material
 Skid wires (for pipe type cables only)
 Concentric neutral wires
 Armour/Reinforcing tape
 Armour bedding/Armour serving
 Jacket, oversheat and pipe coating material

16  2 – The Cable Library


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

A number of commands are common to all Data dialog boxes. You will find them at the bottom of the
windows:

Previous Displays the previous layer on the list.


Next Displays the next layer on the list.
Reset Erases all changes made during the current editing session.
Ok Retains the information entered in the window, displays the data on the cross-sectional
display and closes the window.
Cancel Closes the data window without retaining the information entered in that window from the
moment it was last displayed. Clicking the X at the right hand top corner has the same
effect.

Conductor data

2 – The Cable Library  17


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Conductor material
The conductor material can be copper, aluminum or any other “custom” material. Independently of the choice,
the program needs the DC conductor material resistivity at 20°C (in ·m) and the temperature coefficient at
20°C (in K-1) for the resistance calculation. When aluminum or copper is selected the program assumes the
following values:
Copper =1.7241e-08, =3.93e-03

Aluminum =2.8264e-08, =4.03e-03


When the user selects the conductor material, these values must be provided.
Resistance values per IEC 60228
The resistance of the conductors can be calculated or taken from the tabulated values in the Standard IEC
60228. The conductor material, type and construction are all taken into account during the course of the
calculations. The user may choose the option to obtain the resistance of the conductor from the resistance
tables of the Standard IEC 60228. Depending on conductor cross-sectional area, construction type and
material, a different resistance value will be considered. The following restrictions and/or assumptions apply:
 IEC 60228 resistance values apply ONLY to copper and aluminum conductors.
 IEC 60228 resistance values pertaining to PLAIN conductors are considered. In other words, the current
version of the program does not support METAL-COATED conductors.
 For conductor sizes in-between standard tabulated values, linear Interpolation is used to arrive at the
estimated resistance value.
 If the user wishes to consider resistances applicable to class 1-conductors (table I of IEC 60228), the
choice "solid" must be used for the Conductor construction option.
 If the user wishes to consider resistances applicable to class 2 conductors (table II of IEC 60228), the
choices "stranded", "compact/compressed", "sector-shaped" and "oval" are pertinent. No other conductor
construction option is supported for IEC 60228 compatible calculations.
 If a conductor cross-section is entered for the cable and not supported by IEC 60228, the program will
revert to the alternate mode, i.e. the resistance will be calculated.
 For conductor cross-sections, corresponding to blank entries in the tables 1 and 2 of IEC 60228, the
program will revert to the alternate mode, i.e. the resistance will be calculated.

Conductor construction
The following choices for conductor construction are supported:
 Stranded (round)
 Compact or compressed (round)
 4 segments
 Hollow core
 6 segments
 Sector shaped
 Oval
 Solid
 5 segments
 Segmental peripheral-strands

18  2 – The Cable Library


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

The selections available are contingent upon the cable type selected as well as the conductor dimensions.
The program will indicate which options are valid by highlighting them in the Construction selection menu of
the Conductor data dialog box.

Means the option selected.


Means that the option is available for selection.
Means that the option is not available for the selected cable.

Drying and impregnation


This information is used to properly correct for skin and proximity effects when calculating the conductor
resistance.

Skin and proximity effect loss factors


Skin and proximity effects are used to calculate the ac resistance of the conductor by adjusting the dc
conductor resistance by the factors Ys (skin effect) and Yp (proximity effect) as follows:

Rac = Rdc (1 + Ys +Yp): Rac, Rdc are AC and DC resistances, respectively.

In calculating Ys and Yp the constants Ks and Kp are used. The program assumes the following values based
on conductor construction. Note that these values have been compiled for copper conductors. Nevertheless,
the same values will be assumed for aluminum except for segmented conductors which value is shown in the
table. The approximation is considered to be on the safe side.

Conductor Construction Ks Kp
Round stranded dried and impregnated 1.00 0.80
Round stranded not dried and impregnated 1.00 1.00
Round compact dried and impregnated 1.00 0.80
Round compact not dried and impregnated 1.00 1.00
Round segmental (Copper 4 segments) 0.435 0.37
Round segmental (Copper 6 segments) 0.39 0.37
Hollow, helical stranded, dried, impregnated * 0.80
Sector shaped dried and impregnated 1.00 0.80
Sector shaped not dried and impregnated 1.00 1.00
Round segmental (Aluminum 4 segments) 0.28 0.37
Round segmental (Aluminum 5 segments) 0.19 0.37
Round segmental (Aluminum 6 segments) 0.12 0.37
* See calculation method in table 2 of the IEC Standard 60287-1-1
The user can also enter different values using the CYMCAP GUI as shown in the following figure.

2 – The Cable Library  19


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Conductor shield data


The program supports "conductor screens", as a cable component. The term "shield" is often used as
equivalent to the term "screen".

Notes:  Non-metallic screens are modeled as part of the insulation.


 If a conductor shield is modeled, the program will assume its material to be the same as the
insulation material.
 The conductor shield is taken into account as part of the insulation when the thermal
resistance is computed, but it will not be considered as part of the insulation for the
calculation of the dielectric losses.

20  2 – The Cable Library


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Insulation data
The insulation materials supported are listed below along with their
assumed thermal resistivities.
The user can also enter a custom material. In this case, the thermal
resistivity has to be provided along with K (specific insulation
resistance at 60F) and the appropriate coefficients for dielectric loss
calculations (tan() and ). Thermal resistivity values are shown in
K·m/W.
Material i
Solid type/mass impregnated non draining cable 6.0
LPOF self contained cable 5.0
HPOF self contained cable 5.0
HPOF pipe type cable 5.0
External gas pressure cable 5.5
Internal gas pressure preimpregnated cable 5.5
Internal gas pressure mass impregnated cable 6.0
Butyl rubber 5.0
EPR 5.0
PVC 6.0
Polyethylene 3.5
Cross linked polyethylene (XLPE) (unfilled) 3.5
Cross linked polyethylene (XLPE) (filled) 3.5
Paper-polypropylene-paper-laminate 6.5

Dielectric loss factors for insulating materials


The program assumes the following values for loss-related factors in the dielectric (values taken from IEC
60287).

Dielectric Loss Factors


Paper Impregnated Cables
ε tan()
Impregnated, pre-impregnated or mass-impregnated non-draining 4.0 0.01
Self-contained, oil filled, up to Uo= 36kV 3.6 0.0035
Self-contained, oil filled, up to Uo= 87kV 3.6 0.0033
Self-contained, oil filled, up to Uo= 160 kV 3.6 0.0030
Self-contained, oil filled, up to Uo= 220 kV 3.6 0.0028
Oil-pressure pipe-type 3.7 0.0045
External gas-pressure 3.6 0.004
Internal gas-pressure 3.4 0.0045
Butyl rubber 4.0 0.05
EPR up to and including 36 kVLL 3.0 0.020
EPR above 36 kVLL 3.0 0.005
PVC 8.0 0.1
PE (HD and LD) 2.3 0.001
XLPE up to and including 36 kVLL (unfilled) 2.5 0.004
XLPE above 36 kVLL (unfilled) 2.5 0.001
XLPE above 36 kVLL (filled) 3.0 0.005
Paper-polypropylene-paper-laminate (PPP or PPL) 3.5 0.00095

2 – The Cable Library  21


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

When the option “IEC scope extended” in the menu “Preferences” is selected (the option is selected by
default), the dielectric losses are taken into account regardless of the voltage level. When the option is not
selected, the dielectric losses are only taken into account for values of Uo equal to or greater than the
following values as per IEC 60287-1-1©:
Type of cable Uo kV
Cables insulated with impregnated paper
Solid- type 38
Oil-filled (LPOF, HPOF) 63.5
Gas-pressure 63.5
Cables with other types of insulation
Butyl rubber 18
EPR 63.5
PVC 6
Polyethylene (HD and LD) 127
XLPE (unfilled) 127
XLPE (filled) 63.5
Paper-polypropylene-paper (not in IEC) 63.5

Insulation screen
When copper or aluminum insulation screens are specified, the
program performs calculations according to IEC 60287 in order to
calculate the thermal resistance of the screened insulation. These
calculations apply to three core cables only.
For single core cables the insulation screen is treated as a separate
layer.
When the semiconducting insulation screen option is selected, the
insulation screen will be considered as part of the insulation for both
single core and 3-core cables. The term "shield" is commonly used
for "screen".
For 3-phase cables, the program assumes that the insulation
screening applies to the insulation of the individual conductor cores.
The same is true for sector-shaped cables.
The term "belted" is used by the program to identify 3-phase cables
with no screens featuring an additional layer of insulation
encompassing all 3 conductors.

22  2 – The Cable Library


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Sheath
Sheath material and resistivity
The sheath electrical resistivity  (·m at 20°C) and the thermal
coefficient  (K-1) are required for the calculations. Supported
materials read as follows:

Material  
Lead 21.4e-08 4.0e-03
Aluminum 2.84e-08 4.03e-03
Copper 1.72e-08 3.93e-03
The user can enter any other material by selecting “Custom” in the
Material list, but in this case the values of  and  must be entered;
the program will display a dialog box to allow the user to do so.
Sheath construction
The program supports both radial and longitudinal construction for
sheath corrugation for the case of aluminum, copper and custom only.
When default dimensions are set by the program, the calculation for
the sheath thickness followed for the case of aluminum, is applied to
copper and custom; see section Sheath related defaults.

Sheath reinforcing material


CYMCAP allows the user to enter a sheath reinforcement tape for
sheathed cables or tape over insulation screen for pipe type cables.
The thickness refers to the radial dimension and it is used to
compute the diameter and vice versa. Width is the axial dimension of
the tapes as shown in the illustration below.

The length of lay is the longitudinal distance required for a particular


tape to give one revolution around the previous layer (see the figure
below). When the length of lay is not available, a value of 10 times
the previous layer diameter can be used.

2 – The Cable Library  23


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Skid wires (for pipe type cables only)


Skid wires are applicable to pipe type cables only. Despite the fact
that skid and concentric wires share similar information, skid wires
data entry dialog boxes are dedicated to pipe type cables. No cable
can have both skid and concentric neutral wires. The program
assumes that the skid wires are semicircles. Two skid wires will be
assumed present, by default, by the program but the number can be
changed; see High pressure oil (gas) filled cables item 5. Skid
Wires, in Chapter 12. Length of lay considerations applicable to skid
wires, are identical to the ones for concentric neutral wires.
The Area value corresponds to the cross-sectional area of the layer
and cannot be changed. This value is automatically recalculated
each time a user changes the thickness, the diameter or the number
of wires.

Concentric neutral wires


Concentric neutral wires are, usually, return wires in distribution
cables. The program assumes that these wires are bare (no
insulating or plastic wrap that they may be equipped with, is
supported). Data for the concentric neutral comprise the wire size,
the number of wires as well as the length of lay; see section
Concentric neutral cables, for defaults. The concentric wires may be
made of copper, brass, zinc, or stainless steel. CYMCAP supports
flat-straps concentric neutrals.

Material  
Copper 1.7241e-08 3.93e-03
Aluminum 2.8264e-08 4.03e-03
Stainless steel 70.000e-08 0.000000
Zinc 6.1100e-08 0.004
Brass/Bronze 3.5000e-08 0.003
If other than the above materials are to be used (select “Custom” to
do so), the user has to provide resistivity and temperature
coefficient.  is expressed in ·m at 20°C and  in K-1.
The Area value corresponds to the cross-sectional area of the layer
and cannot be changed. This value is automatically recalculated
each time a user changes the thickness, the diameter or the number
of wires.

24  2 – The Cable Library


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Jacket around each core (SL-type cables only)


CYMCAP supports SL-type cables with an additional jacket over each sheath or concentric neutral wire. See
description of SL-type cables in the section Useful considerations.

The following materials are supported for the jacket around each core:

Material Thermal resistivity ()


Compounded jute and fibrous materials 6.0
Rubber sandwich 6.0
Polychloroprene 5.5
P.V.C. 6.0
Ethylene-propylene rubber 5.0
Butyl rubber 5.0
Coal tar wrapping 4.5
Select the Custom material option if materials else than those listed
above are to be used. In this case, the thermal resistivity T of the
custom material, which is expressed in K·m/W, has to be provided.

2 – The Cable Library  25


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Armour/Reinforcing tape
CYMCAP supports cable armour assemblies in the form of either wires
or tapes.
For the case of armour wires, the program requests as data the number
of wires (if not touching), the wire size and the length of lay. For the
case of armour tapes, besides the number of tapes and the length of
lay, the tape width must also be provided.
For thermal calculations the armour resistivity as well as the thermal
coefficients are also needed.
The Area value corresponds to the cross-sectional area of the layer and
cannot be changed. This value is automatically recalculated each time
a user changes the thickness, the diameter or the number of wires.

The following materials are internally supported: ( is expressed in ·m at 20°C and  in K-1).

Material 
Custom non magnetic tape User-defined User-defined
Custom, magnetic armour wires User-defined User-defined
Custom magnetic tape User-defined User-defined
Custom, non magnetic wires User-defined User-defined
Steel wires touching 13.8 E-08 0.0045
Steel wires not touching 13.8 E-08 0.0045
Steel tape reinforcement 13.8 E-08 0.00393
Copper armour wires 1.721 E-08 0.00393
Stainless steel armour 70.0 E-08 0.0
IEC TECK armour 2.84 E-08 0.0043

If any other material is to be used (select “Custom” to do so), the user has to supply the above parameters.
When magnetic losses are of importance, additional data needs to be entered to model the eddy currents and
hysteresis losses of the armour. The parameters needed are the longitudinal and transverse permeability (
and respectively) as well as the angular time delay . The user can enter these parameters or have the
program select them. When the program selects, it will assume:
 =400, =10 for steel wires touching or
 =1 for steel wires not touching and =45 degrees.

The same values will be assumed for steel tapes. Magnetic properties modelling for the armour is supported
only for steel armour assemblies.

26  2 – The Cable Library


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Armour bedding/Armour serving


CYMCAP defines as armour bedding the layer that is normally encountered below the armour assembly.
Armour serving is defined as the layer of protective coverings sometimes found above the armour assembly.
The following materials are supported for armour bedding.

Thermal resistivity
Material
(K·m/W)
Compounded jute and fibrous materials =6.0
Rubber sandwich =6.0

If any other material is to be used, the user must provide the thermal resistivity. Values for many insulating
materials are given in section Insulation data.

2 – The Cable Library  27


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Jacket, oversheath and pipe coating material


The following materials are supported for cable jacket oversheath
and pipe coating (for pipe type cables only).
Thermal
Material
resistivity ()
Compounded jute and fibrous materials 6.0
Rubber sandwich 6.0
Polychloroprene 5.5
P.V.C up to and 35 kV 5.0
P.V.C. above 35 kV 6.0
Butyl rubber 5.0
Coal tar wrapping 4.5

Note: Pipe and pipe coating material is entered in the specific installation data and not in cable
data. See Section Specific cable installation data for all the details.

Creating a new cable - Example


In this section, we will go through the steps of creating a new cable for illustration purpose. The cable will be a
typical 250KCMIL distribution cable, rated 35 kV. The cable features Aluminum stranded conductor, XLPE
insulation and copper concentric neutral wires. In what follows a typical sequence of the steps required to
create a cable is outlined.
To create a new cable in the library, click on any cable in the Cable library tab of the Navigator and then click
on New. If the highlighted cable is to be used as a template for the new one, answer “Yes” to the ensuing
prompt. In the current example, click on “No” in order to create the cable from scratch.
The following screen will ask you to provide a cable ID and a cable Title. The cable ID should be unique
because it is used internally as a database index. The cable ID and the cable title will then appear in the
Cable library browser.
Comments are optional, but frequently important.
The Group Cable Name is a filter that allows grouping many cables under a same folder in the cable library.
Select in the drop-down list the name of the group the current cable belongs to or type a new name to create
a new group. There can be an unlimited number of groups in the cable library.
Once in the navigator under the Cable tab you will be able to see the folders corresponding to the group of
cables that have been created. Double-click on the name of the desired group to open it and see the list of
cables belonging to that group. Double-click again on the folder icon at the top of the list to close it and to go

28  2 – The Cable Library


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

back to the full list of cables in the library. By default, no group is assigned to a new cable. This may be used
for example to group cables of the same manufacturer.

Click OK to accept the data entered and the screen that follows allows the user to begin defining in details the
cable construction, from the point of view of component availability.
First specify whether the new cable will be a single-core or a three-core, by clicking on one of the buttons next
to the Cable Type combo box:

To specify a single-conductor cable.

To specify a three-conductor cable

Then specify the cable type as EXTRUDED in the Cable type combo box.

The program then prompts for the nominal cable voltage (kV); indicate “35” kV, then the click OK button.

2 – The Cable Library  29


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

The next piece of data required is the conductor size. Open the standard conductor sizes dropdown list and
select “250 KCMIL”. A default Conductor Area will then be displayed, you may change this.

Once the conductor size and the voltage are entered, the program is ready to accept more instructions by
displaying the following screen. You will notice that a ribbon now displays the layers that are possible to be
added based on the information entered up to this point.

It is seen that no dimensions are entered at all, as the encircled quantities show. The program also indicates
that no materials were defined at all. Before proceeding to materials and dimensions, we must first
specify the generic cable components. Among the generic components only the cable insulation has been
enabled so far (see the layers ribbon). Let us enable the insulation screen, the concentric neutral and the
jacket.

30  2 – The Cable Library


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Note that the concentric wires were not drawn yet. They will be displayed on the cross-section when specific
data is entered later.
Once all the generic components for the cables are entered, we tell the program that their definition has
ended by clicking on the Complete Cable button appearing on the top part of the window. The program then
displays the Data dialog box for the first generic component, the conductor, in order to accept further
instructions about materials, construction type and dimensions. Clicking on the Reset button will display the
last saved data.

Note: The program will only allow saving once all the data required to define the layers of your
cable have been be entered.

2 – The Cable Library  31


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Several alternatives for the conductor material and construction are available. Choices that are either not
permitted or irrelevant, based on the data entered so far, are locked, as the appropriate locker symbol next to
them indicates, and are not available for selection.
Define the material, construction and dimensions on the same screen and to proceed to the following generic
component, click the Next button at the bottom of the Conductor Data dialog box. You will notice that when
you click Next, the layers list in the cross-section window will now display the information you have just
entered. Clicking OK has the same effect on the cross-section, but it will close the Data dialog box.
The next layer of our example is the insulation. The dialog box for the insulation is as follows:

The information that needs to be entered here includes the maximum design (steady state) and emergency
(transient) operating temperatures the particular cable can withstand. Default values are assigned
automatically depending on the insulation type material selected by the user. The program will use these
values for the corresponding analysis options unless changed by the user.
You proceed in this fashion for the remaining layers. Missing data is indicated with a red circle or with the

word “unknown” on the cross-section display. Once all the necessary data is entered, the Save button
will be enabled, as well as the corresponding File > Save and the File > Save as menu items.
Note that when you open a cable that is contained in the library, the Save button and the Save menu option
are disabled until you make a change. When they are enabled and you use them, the program saves the data
under the Cable ID and the Cable Title that are displayed.
The Save As menu option remains available even if you do not make a change to the cable displayed. If you
use that last option, the program will prompt you to enter new Cable ID and Cable Title.

32  2 – The Cable Library


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

The completed cable looks as follows:

Additional input data like length of lay, internal and external radius of corrugated sheath, dimensions of flat-
strapped concentric neutrals, etc, can be displayed in lieu of the list as shown above by pressing on the space
bar.

Clicking on the “hyperlinks” will open the corresponding data


dialog box, with the corresponding field highlighted in it.

2 – The Cable Library  33


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Useful considerations

Cable layers
1. The sequence of cable components in CYMCAP assumes a start from the conductor and expands
outwards with the insulation, insulation shield, sheath, sheath reinforcement, concentric neutral wires,
armour bedding, armour, armour serving, and finally the jacket. It is in this spirit that the terms are used in
the program and their definition should be respected.
2. When creating a cable, it is possible that layers not directly identifiable with any of the available
components are encountered. Closer inspection, often, reveals that one of the available layers by the
program can be directly used because different names are often interchangeably used for the same layer.
For example, CYMCAP will not accept a cable jacket once armour is defined for a given cable. The cable
jacket then can alternatively be modeled as armour serving.
3. If the need for a layer not supported by CYMCAP arises, you can combine two layers in one by
calculating an equivalent thermal resistivity for two layers in series. This can be particularly useful for the
cases where materials of different thermal resistivity are used for either armour serving or bedding. A
conservative approach from a thermal resistance point of view would be to model the two layers as one
having as thermal resistivity the one with the higher value.
4. When a layer is deleted, the user does not have to reflect the change in the dimensions imposed beyond
that layer towards the cable surface. The program will automatically adjust the dimensions accordingly.
The same holds true if a layer is inserted. If a layer is deleted and then reinserted, the layer dimensions
are automatically restored as long as the cable was not saved or that the program session has not been
terminated.

Particular modeling
1. When cables with oval conductors are to be modeled, the user should enter the equivalent round
conductor diameter

√ √
Where:
√ and √ are the respective lengths of the major and minor elliptical axis of the oval
conductor.
2. Include semi-conductive swellings in the semi-conductive screen over the insulation, etc.
3. To model armour wires embedded in the jacket, you can represent the portion of the layer below the
wires as armour bedding, the wires as armour, and the portion of the layer above the wires as armour
serving.
4. Inter-jackets and jackets around armour assemblies should be modeled as armour bedding and
serving, because the program does not allow jacket in presence of armour.
5. Metallic parts that are associated with circulating currents should be modeled as sheaths, even if
they are termed screens. This assures that the program calculates properly the loss factors.

34  2 – The Cable Library


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

SL-type cables
SL-type cables are 3-conductor cables characterized by the fact that every core has its own sheath or armour
wires. The program supports either options but not both simultaneously.
The SL-type construction is identified during the cable data entry by specifying either individual sheath or
individual armour construction. Note that the following restrictions apply to the construction of SL-type cables:
 SL-type cables are not permitted to have metallic insulation screens.
 No sheath reinforcement is supported for SL-type cables.
 Corrugated sheaths are not supported for SL-type cables.
 SL-type cables will either have individual sheaths or individual concentric neutral wires but not both.
 When SL-type cables are modeled, the bonding arrangement selections available are either “single point
bonded” or “two point bonded”.
 Default dimensions for SL-type cables sheaths and armour wires follow the same defaults as for single-
core cables.

Custom materials and thermal capacitances


CYMCAP gives the user the possibility to enter custom materials for many of the cable components metallic
or not. For many non-metallic parts as: insulation, armour bedding, serving etc. the thermal capacitance of the
particular component is needed for transient ampacity calculations. Although the program will consider
specific thermal capacitance values for known and tabulated selected material types, when custom materials
are specified typical values are assumed for the thermal capacitances. The application supports ASCII fields
for any type of user-defined components so that their name, as well as their parameters can be clearly
identified. The following screen illustrates the concept.

2 – The Cable Library  35


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Filter Editor
It is not uncommon to desire to locate cables with particular construction characteristics, in addition to the
major generic classification provided by the primary filter that is the Search Utility of the Navigator pop-up
menu (see section Cable library pop-up menu). In this case, invoking the more advanced search/filtering
facilities of CYMCAP is needed. From the cable library navigator screen, invoke the Filter Editor as shown
below:

Once the filter is invoked, the user is presented with the option to specify any particular cable characteristics
for the search, as shown below.
In this particular example illustrated, single core, medium voltage cables (rated higher than 6.00 kV) featuring
a conductor cross-section larger than 1250 mm2, copper conductor of stranded construction, with concentric
neutral and XLPE insulation are specified for the search.

36  2 – The Cable Library


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Notes:  More detailed searches comprising non-metallic components can also be


included.
 To bring any cable component attribute in the Filter elements selected list and
collect all the desired cable characteristics as search attributes, select the desired
feature in the Filter elements available list and click on the right arrow.
 To remove an attribute from the list, select it in the Filter elements selected
section and click on the left arrow.
 The specified search characteristics are summarized at the bottom of the screen
in the Filter to apply on Cable Library field.
 A name can be given to the particular filter search characteristics set and saved
for future reference.

2 – The Cable Library  37


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

3 – The Ductbank Library

Introduction
Duct banks are pre-arranged assemblies of conduits where cables are placed for underground installations.
This chapter describes how to enter new duct banks in the library and how to manage an existing library of
duct banks. The geometrical disposition of these pre-constructed assemblies is needed to perform the
simulations for cables placed in the conduits of the duct bank. Access to the Ductbank Library allows you not
only to add a new duct bank, but to modify and delete previously entered duct banks.
The Ductbank Library contains, and permits building, standard duct banks only. These are duct banks with all
the ducts being of the same size and aligned horizontally and vertically. The number of rows and columns do
not have to be the same, but all ducts in a given row or column must be aligned. Non-standard duct banks,
ducts of different size, and unaligned ducts can be entered in a CYMCAP simulation when the installation is
being set up. An example on how to build non-standard duct banks can be found in section Defining standard
and/or non-standard duct banks.

Ductbank library management


In the CYMCAP Navigator, click on the Ductbank tab in the CYMCAP to access the Ductbank library. The
list of the duct banks in the library is shown as follows:

Each duct bank available in the Library is identified with its unique ID and NAME.

3 – The Ductbank Library  39


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

A picture showing the duct bank cross section is displayed in the viewer pane to the right of the window and
corresponding to the selected duct bank in the list. Press the Up and Down arrow keyboard keys to browse
through the library. CYMCAP allows the user to view the salient aspects of the various duct banks without
resorting to detailed editing.
To ADD a duct bank to the library, select any library entry to highlight it and click on the New button located to
the right of the Navigator list. You will be prompted to either use a duct bank as a template or create a
completely new one. If you choose the template option, the currently highlighted duct bank entry will be used
as the template.
To MODIFY a duct bank, select the duct bank of interest and click on the Edit button located to the right of
the Navigator list. The same task can be accomplished by double-clicking on the duct bank entry.
To DELETE a duct bank, select the duct bank of interest and click on the Delete button located to the right of
the navigator list.

Creating a new duct bank. An illustrative example.


A new duct bank will be created for illustration purposes. The duct bank will be a sample 3x3 duct bank, i.e.
consisting of 3 series of conduits and 3 columns of conduits. In what follows, a typical sequence of the
steps/screens/dialog boxes required to enter a new duct bank is outlined for illustration purposes.
To create a new duct bank in the library, select any entry in the list and click on the New button. If the
selected duct bank is to be used as a template for the new one, answer Yes to the ensuing prompt.

For this example, we will not use an existing duct bank as a template.
The program then prompts for the entry of a Ductbank name.

40  3 – The Ductbank Library


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Once the duct bank name is entered, two windows are displayed side by side: the Ductbank Library
designer dialog box and the Ductbank design data window. The geometrical details outlining the duct bank
construction are entered in the Ductbank Library designer dialog box. The cross-section of the duct bank is
shown in the Ductbank design data window and is updated as the data characteristics are entered in the
Ductbank Library designer dialog box.

3 – The Ductbank Library  41


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

When the cursor is positioned into any data entry field, the dimension in question is outlined on the small
auxiliary help screen appearing in the Ductbank Library designer dialog box.

Two methods of entering the dimensions of the ductbank are possible. The user can select the appropriate
one at the bottom of the window. Here are the following options:
 Distances entered from duct center to edge (default one)
 Clearances entered from duct to edge
A list of ducts sorted by nominal size (from the American Standard) is available to help define rapidly the
inside and the outside diameters of the duct.
The following illustrates the new duct bank with its complete characteristics.

Click OK to accept the data entered and save the new duct bank in the library. The newly entered duct bank
now appears as a new entry in the Ductbank Library.

42  3 – The Ductbank Library


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

4 – Load-Curves/Heat Source
Curves and Shape Libraries

Introduction
This chapter describes how to manage the last three libraries of CYMCAP. In what follows, the terms “Load
curve” and “Heat source curve” are treated as conceptually identical, as far as library management is
concerned, despite their physical difference. The term “Curve”, wherever used, means both. Whatever
statements are made, however, for Load curves, apply equally well to Heat Source curves. These curves are
used by CYMCAP only for TRANSIENT ANALYSIS.
Load Library – This library includes the available load curves, which are the patterns of current versus time,
and that are used to indicate how the current in a given cable varies as a function of time over a specific time
period. Access to a wide variety of loading patterns is thus assured for various transient studies. Much like the
various types of cables, the different load curves are kept in a separate library. You can think of a Load Curve
as being the weekly load profile of a particular feeder section.
Heat Source Library – This library contains the Heat Source curves, which are the patterns of heat source
intensity versus time, and that are used to indicate how the heat source intensity varies as a function of time
over a specific time period.
The Shape Library contains the shapes that are the building blocks used to construct both the Load curves
and the Heat Source curves. The Shape library is common to both the Load Library and the Heat Source
Library. A shape can be related to the daily load profile of a particular feeder section.

Curves and shapes


CYMCAP uses the notion of Shapes to assure through modularity flexibility and efficiency in describing the
various curve variations versus time.
A Shape is essentially a curve that spans at most 24 hours. Shapes are used to represent daily variations
and feature, typically, hourly resolution. They need, however, to last at least 10 minutes since the numerical
techniques of the CYMCAP engine do not have the resolution to properly compute shorter variations. The
various shapes can be stored separately in the Shape Library. This shape library can be accessed when
constructing a curve that spans one or more days. It is useful therefore to conceptualize the shapes not as
stand-alone short-term Load variations but as the building blocks for the Load curves.
A load curve describes the variation of the Loading of Cable/Heat Source intensity with time. It may be
composed of one or more shapes, depending on the duration of the transient to be simulated. There is no
limit in the number of days that a load shape can model.

4 – Load-Curves/Heat Source Curves and Shape Libraries  43


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

It is important to realize that CYMCAP forms an association between shapes and curves. No curve can be
defined without a shape, and at least one shape is necessary to construct a curve. When shapes are modified
within the shape library, these actions directly affect the curves associated with these shapes. No shape that
belongs to an existing curve can be deleted.

Note: All variations, within the context of the curve definition, are expressed in p.u. The base
quantity is the current/heat source intensity the cable/heat source carries at steady
state as resulted/defined from the steady state ampacity or temperature simulations.

CYMCAP is also capable of interpreting recorded field measurements and construct Load Curves that
faithfully reproduce these recordings, with an hourly resolution. These measurements need to be logged in an
ASCII file that follows a specific FORMAT. The resulting Load curves are directly usable by the program for
transient studies.

Shape Library Management


The main tool for managing the Shape Library is the CYMCAP Navigator. Clicking on the Shape tab of the
Navigator gives access to the Shape Library. The list of all available shapes in the shape library appears as
shown in the following illustration:

Whenever a shape is selected in the list, it will be displayed in the lower part of the window. This way,
CYMCAP allows rapid visualization of the shapes without resorting to detailed editing.
To EDIT a shape, select the shape to be edited and click on the Edit button to the right. You can also edit a
shape by double-clicking on it.
To CREATE a new shape, select any shape in the list to highlight it and then click on the New button to the
right. The program will ask if you want to use the shape which is highlighted as a template or if you want to
create a brand new one.

44  4 – Load-Curves/Heat Source Curves and Shape Libraries


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

To RENAME a shape you must Edit it first.


To DELETE a shape, select the shape to be deleted and click on the Delete button to the right. If that shape
is used within a Load curve a warning will follow.

Creating a new shape – An Illustrative example


Assume a shape that spans 24 hours, with the following characteristics:
 The first 2 hours will experience a load current of 0.3 p.u.,
 the next 4 hours a load current of 0.6 p.u.,
 the next 5 hours a load current of 0.85 p.u.,
 the next half hour a load current of 0.34 p.u.,
 the next 4 hours a current of 0.7 p.u.,
 the next 5 hours a current of 0.5 p.u.
 and the remaining 3.5 hours a current of 0.92 p.u.
Enter the CYMCAP Navigator and access the Shape Library. Select any shape in the list and click on New. In
the screen that follows, the prompt asks if the selected shape is to be used as a template. We will create a
new shape from scratch, thus the answer to the prompt is No.

We next enter the Shape manager workbench. It is at this point that data particular to this shape can be
entered. At first a title is needed for the shape. This title must be unique and different from the remaining
shape titles.
After entering the title, the time-current data need to be entered. Note that when the table first appears, all
entries of the table are blank and there is no drawing for any segments of the shape. As soon as data is
entered for the shape, the drawn curve is refreshed in correspondence.

4 – Load-Curves/Heat Source Curves and Shape Libraries  45


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Notes:  When data for a shape is entered, the current value cannot exceed 1.0 p.u.
Scaling factors can, however, be used when building the Load Curve.
 Every time the cursor is positioned in a given field, the appropriate part of the
drawing is highlighted in red for better visualization.

 Also, you have access to the complete list of shapes through the list of shapes
accessible at the top. Note that this list is accessible only when the shape that is
displayed has been saved

46  4 – Load-Curves/Heat Source Curves and Shape Libraries


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

The Shape Manager workbench features six command buttons at the top of the window. They are all used
for shape management purposes. Position the cursor on any of the buttons and a tool-tip appears indicating
their function. More specifically:

Saves the shape with the modifications.

Saves as a new shape.

Delete the shape.

Inquires what load curve(s) uses that shape.

Pust a shape in the windows clipboard.

Reverts to the original entries defining a shape, once a modification was effected.

Shifting a shape – An illustrative example


Shapes normally start at “time 0”. You may need, however, to shift a shape so that any given time can be
considered its origin. This is particular useful when you want the origin of your transient study to coincide with
the steady state calculation. The application permits this operation to be done without redefining the shape
using the Shift curve… button located at the bottom of the window. For instance, assume that the following
shape is to be shifted at the 5th hour. Click on Shift curve… and enter the desired hour.

4 – Load-Curves/Heat Source Curves and Shape Libraries  47


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

The resulting shifted shape is illustrated below.

Note how the value previously entered for hour five of 0.73 p.u. shows now at hour zero. The curve has
shifted to the left five hours.

Load and Heat Source Libraries Management


This section presents both the Load Library and the Heat Source Library. Both libraries are structured the
same way, and the commands have the same name.
In the text that follows, typical activities relating to curves management are illustrated with the Load Library as
the example. The very same actions can be done in the Heat Source Library.
The libraries are accessed through the CYMCAP Navigator by clicking on the corresponding tab. The list of
the available curves appears on the top part of the window, while the currently selected curve appears at the
bottom of the window.

48  4 – Load-Curves/Heat Source Curves and Shape Libraries


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

4 – Load-Curves/Heat Source Curves and Shape Libraries  49


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Expanding and collapsing the curves


To the left of every curve name an icon showing a closed drawer is displayed.

Double click on the curve name and the icon changes (the drawer opens)

while at the same time the sequence of shapes composing the Load Curve is displayed.
This action is called “expanding the curve”, and permits immediate identification of the shapes used by the
current curve. The reverse action is called “collapsing the curve”. The numbers in parentheses shown to the
right of every shape are the scaling factors applied to the shape within this particular curve.
After expanding the curve, if any shape is selected it will be highlighted in red on the load curve displayed
below. You will also notice that the command buttons at the right of the window will now show “Shape”
instead of “Load” or “Heat Source”.

This permits rapid shape recognition without access to the shape manager.
Expanding and collapsing the curves can also be accomplished using the pop-up menu accessible with a
right-click.
On the bottom right of the graph two navigation buttons allow to browse the load curve/heat source curve
when it is more than 7 days long. There is no limit in the number of days that compose the load curves/heat
source curves.

50  4 – Load-Curves/Heat Source Curves and Shape Libraries


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

By using these options, a single or many branches can be expanded or collapsed. This may be convenient for
expanding all curves at once.

Curves libraries command buttons


To EDIT a curve, select it in the list and click on the Edit button to the right. You cannot edit a curve by
double-clicking on it since this action is reserved for expanding/collapsing the curve. You can also display the
curve to edit by clicking on the hyperlink appearing at the top of the graphical display of the curve.

To CREATE a new curve, select any curve in the list and click on the New button to the right. If you want to
use any given curve as a template for the new one, select first the one to be used as a template.
To RENAME a load curve you must Edit it first.
To DELETE a curve, select it and click on the Delete button to the right. If that curve is used for any transient
simulation a warning will follow.

4 – Load-Curves/Heat Source Curves and Shape Libraries  51


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Create a Load Curve using existing shapes – An illustrative example


Assume a new Load curve is to be created. This curve will portray a weekly variation. The curve therefore
shall be composed of 7 portions. Each portion can have a different shape. The same shape can be used for
different portions with identical or different scaling factors. For the example in question it is assumed that the
shapes to be used have already been created.
Activate the CYMCAP Navigator and access the Load Library. Select any Load curve and click on the New
Load button.

To the prompt asking if the current load curve is to be used as the template we respond No, which displays
the Load Manager workbench with no shapes selected. When Yes is selected, the workbench is displayed
populated with the data pertaining to the curve being used as the template.

52  4 – Load-Curves/Heat Source Curves and Shape Libraries


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

First, the title of the curve is entered: A WEEKLY CURVE. Then, we start constructing the Load curves from
the available shapes in the Shape library. The Load Manager workbench shows the list of shapes in the left
part of the window, with the Shape(s) for current load field, empty. Select any shape in the Shape Library
list by highlighting it. By clicking to the arrow pointing to the right , the highlighted shape is imported to the
list of shapes composing the Load curve being constructed. The shape selected is now shown as the first
portion of the Load curve being drawn.

Once at least a shape is entered for the Load Curve, the arrow pointing to the left is enabled and can be
used to remove the shape from the Load Curve. Subsequent shapes from the Shape Library list can be used
in a similar fashion to complete the Load curve. You can select and insert several shapes at the same time by
holding down the CTRL key while clicking on the desired shapes.

4 – Load-Curves/Heat Source Curves and Shape Libraries  53


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

The second and third shapes used have all a scaling factor equal to 1 (as the first shape does). The third
shape has a scaling factor of 1.176. The way to assign a scaling factor to any shape is to first import the
shape from the list to the left and then click on the button , shown above the list of shapes composing the
load curve.

The scaling factor entered can be applied to either the given shape or to all the shapes in the Load curve for
uniform scaling. The final shape of the whole Load curve is shown below.

54  4 – Load-Curves/Heat Source Curves and Shape Libraries


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

The new Load curve can be saved and remain in the library for future use. The Load Manager workbench
features several command buttons that summarize the various functions of the workbench.
More specifically:

Save the Load Curve with the modifications.

Import the Load Curve Data from a file (.DAT).

Delete the Load Curve.

Put a Load Curve in the windows clipboard.

Create a new shape. These two commands give direct access to the Shape Manager
workbench (see section Shape Library Management from the
Edit the selected shape. Load Manager workbench).

Revert to the original entries defining the Load Curve, once a modification was effected.

Shapes can be created while building the Load Curve


It is not necessary to have all the shapes available in the Shape Library in order to build the Load Curve. The
Load Manager workbench does not only give access to the Shape Library but also to the basic functions of
the Shape Manager via the Edit Shape and the Create New Shape buttons. Thus shapes can be created
and modified while constructing the Load curve.

4 – Load-Curves/Heat Source Curves and Shape Libraries  55


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Shapes can be assigned different scaling factors within a Load Curve


When a shape is used within a Load curve, a scaling factor can be applied to it. This scaling factor is
applicable only for the given Load curve. The shape data within the shape library are left intact. If the same
shape is used twice in a given Load curve with different scaling factors, the second scaling factor is applied
to the original shape and not to the one entered previously in the load. Every time a shape is imported to a
Load Curve the scaling factor is assumed to be 1.0 even if that shape has already been used with a different
scaling factor.
Change the order of the shapes in the Load curve

Once a Load curve is built, the order of its shapes can be altered. The arrow keys pointing Up and Down
, located to the right of the shapes list composing the Load Curve, are reserved for that purpose. Their
function is essentially the same as the one reserved for the arrows and Keys used to build the Load
Curve.

Select any shape within the Shape(s) for current load list and by clicking on the arrow key , the shape
will be moved up once in the list. The graph showing the Load Curve will also be refreshed accordingly. The
opposite is accomplished by using the arrow key pointing downwards. This way, any shape can assume
any position within the Load curve and portions can be interchanged rapidly, to create new Load curves.
Shapes can be visualized while building the Load Curve
When building a Load curve, the list of shapes available in the shape Library are listed so that a selection can
be made. The exact graph of the shape is not, however, available until a selection is made and the shape
already imported. CYMCAP gives the user the possibility to take a look at any shape before actually importing
the shape to the load curve. To do so, enable the Display mode check box, and select any shape of interest
in the Shape library.

56  4 – Load-Curves/Heat Source Curves and Shape Libraries


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Load Curve from field-recorded data or an Excel file


It is common that measurements over a period of time are taken to determine the actual loading pattern of a
cable. These measurements are often carried out at a given rate, yielding measurements at regular time
intervals. This can continue for several hours, or even days, until a quite detailed set of measurements
reflecting the load variation is obtained.
CYMCAP is capable of interpreting these measurements so that a load curve can be constructed and used
for transient ampacity studies. The following sections explain how the program accomplishes that function.
Field-Recordings and Data Acquisition
It is assumed that the recorded measurements are logged to an ASCII file. It is this file that the program uses
as its input to construct the load curve. The format of this ASCII file is a free format, i.e. no specific record
positions are required for the data. It is imperative however, that (a) no field is missing (b) fields are
interpreted in the proper sequence and (c) fields are separated by at least one blank character (space). Tab
separations are not valid.
Each record of this ASCII file is composed of 3 fields: the time field, the date field and the current intensity
field. The program will assume this field sequence for any ASCII file provided as input data.
Excel file and Data Acquisition
For the Excel format file, each record is composed of three columns: the time field, the date field and the
current intensity field.

Time field The Time field indicates the exact time the measurement took place and is composed of
2 digits denoting the hour indicator followed by 2 digits denoting the minutes indicator,
separated by a dot. No other format will be accepted. For example, 01.10 denotes a
measurement which took place at 1:10 a.m., while 13.10 denotes a measurement that
took place at 1:10 p.m. The valid range for the hour indicator is from 00 to 23 and for
the minute indicator from 00 to 59.
Date field The Date field indicates the exact day and month the measurement took place and is
composed of 2 digits denoting the month indicator followed by 2 digits denoting the day
indicator, separated by a slash (/). For example, 08/09 denotes a measurement that
took place on the ninth day of the eighth month. No other format will be accepted. No
year indicator is supported. It is recommended, if the year is important, to include it in the
Load curve title.
Current The Current Intensity field indicates the current that was measured on the date
Intensity field designated by the date field at the time designated by the time field. It is expressed in
Amperes.

4 – Load-Curves/Heat Source Curves and Shape Libraries  57


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Format Example:
00.00 08/08 55.00
01.10 08/08 60.00
13.25 08/08 50.00
13.45 08/08 60.00
14.02 08/08 50.00
14.22 08/08 60.00
15.01 08/08 40.00
15.32 08/09 60.00
15.57 08/09 34.00
16.32 08/09 40.00
16.43 08/09 60.00
22.22 08/09 33.00
23.59 08/09 14.00

Remarks on Constructing a Load curve from a Data file or an Excel file


 When constructing a Load Curve from a data file, each day is assumed to be a different portion having its
own shape. There will therefore be as many different portions as the number of the defined days.
 If more than one measurement is obtained during one hour, the average of the recordings is taken as
being the representative loading of the cable for that hour. If no measurement is recorded for the hour, a
zero value of current will be assumed.
 If the load curve is supposed to span several days, no date is permitted to be missing from the starting
date until the specified number of days is exhausted. The maximum number of days permitted in a Load
curve is 7.
 When the Load curve is constructed and all the days with their 24-hour intervals defined, the interval with
the maximum value of current is used to normalize the load curve. Thus, the interval with the highest
recorded current value will appear as carrying a 1.00 p.u. current, while the rest of the intervals will
feature a p.u. value which is found by dividing the actual current value for the interval by this maximum
current value. The normalizing current is also indicated, once the calculations are completed. This piece
of data can be useful when defining scale factors for the various cables in order to specify desired
ampacity levels.
 The user can always edit the load curves produced from a recorded data file. It must be mentioned,
however, that once this is done the modified load curve will not reflect the data contained in the data file
which is associated with that load curve.

58  4 – Load-Curves/Heat Source Curves and Shape Libraries


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Entering A Load Curve from an ASCII Data file or an Excel file


Activate CYMCAP, enter the navigator and access the Load Manager. Do not use the existing curve as a
template and enter a title for the new curve as shown.

Then click on the Import from file button in order to enter a Load curve from data recorded to an ASCII
file. Select the directory in which the file with the recordings are located and select the file.

Then click on Open and the new Load curve will be created. For the Excel format, select the “Excel” file type
to get a list of all Excel files of the current folder.
When a Load curve is created from recorded data, new shapes are automatically created for each day in the
file. These shapes are given default names and are automatically put in the Shape Library.

Note: The functionality described above is currently only supported for Load Curves. Heat
source Load curves need to be entered using the Graphical User Interface. However,
one can import the data of a Heat Source in an auxiliary Load to get the Shapes imported to
the Shape Library. Then the user can use those imported shapes to build the Heat Source in
the same way as a Load is built.

4 – Load-Curves/Heat Source Curves and Shape Libraries  59


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

5 – Steady State Thermal


Analysis

General
This chapter describes the necessary steps to perform steady state ampacity and/or temperature rise
analysis. The available generic analysis options are outlined as well as the supported cable installations.
The term steady state means that cables are loaded with a continuous current with the surrounding ambient
conditions assumed temporally constant.

Methodology and computational standards


CYMCAP deals with cables at all alternating voltages and direct voltages (up to 5kV). Cables can be directly
buried, in ducts/pipes, in backfills, in duct banks, in air, in troughs (add-on module) or in casings (add-on
module). The techniques and formulas outlined in the International standards IEC-60287©, IEC-60853© and
IEC-60949© issued by the International Electrotechnical Commission are used throughout the calculations.
CYMCAP includes analysis, options, computation methods, cable configurations that are not directly
addressed in the IEC standards:
- Neher-McGrath approach for cyclic loading
- Modeling of non-isothermal earth surface conditions
- Modeling of soil drying out prevention in the vicinity of the cable/duct surface and ductbank/backfill
surface ( available in the MDB add-on module)
- Multiple cables per phase
- Cables on riser poles with different venting conditions
- Cables in magnetic ducts/risers
- Cables in tunnels
- Modeling of rectangular duct banks and backfills of any size by the extended geometric factor
- Underground installation in non-homogeneous medium (with multiple area having different thermal
resistivity) through the MDB add-on module
The permissible current rating of an AC cable is derived from the expression for the temperature rise
above ambient temperature:

( ) ( ( ) ) ( ( ) ) ( )
Where:

I = Current flowing in one conductor (A)


= Conductor temperature rise above ambient (°C)

5 – Steady State Thermal Analysis  61


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

ac resistance per unit length of the conductor at maximum operating temperature


R =
(/m)

Wd = Dielectric loss per unit length for the insulation surrounding the conductor (W/m)

T1 = Thermal resistance per unit length between conductor and sheath (K·m/W)
Thermal resistance per unit length of the bedding between sheath and armour
T2 =
(K·m/W)

T3 = Thermal resistance per unit length of the external serving of the cable (K·m/W)
Thermal resistance per unit length between the cable surface and the surrounding
T4 =
medium (K·m/W)
Number of load-carrying conductors in the cable (equal size conductors carrying
n =
the same load)

λ1 = Ratio of losses in the metal sheath to total losses in all conductors in that cable

λ2 = Ratio of losses in the armour to total losses in all conductors in that cable

The permissible current rating is obtained from the above formula as follows:

( ( ))

( ) ( )( )

The drying out of the soil is represented by computing the ampacity from the formula:

( ( )) ( )

( ) ( )( )

where:

= temperature difference between critical isotherm and the ambient (critical isotherm is
one at which drying out occurs. The default value is 50°C if the user does not specify
this value)
= ratio of thermal resistivities of dry and moist soil
The non-isothermal surface is modeled by an imaginary layer of soil d meters thick at the earth surface,
where


where:

= convection coefficient
= thermal resistivity of the moist soil
The convection coefficient is computed by the program.

62  5 – Steady State Thermal Analysis


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Accuracy of CYMCAP and References


The following figure shows the results of experiments made to validate the equations in CYMCAP for
underground cables. It can be seen that the simulated and measured results match with reasonable accuracy.

Comparison of test measurements and CYMCAP

The numerical results of CYMCAP have been validated in the following ways:
1. The IEC standards are based for steady state computation on the Neher/McGrath paper [1] and for
transient computation on the Neher paper [2]. They performed experimental verification of their equations.
2. The Canadian Electricity Association (CAE) performed substantial field verifications in the 1980’s for the
early CAP versions. These verifications were made mainly for underground cables [3]. The figure above
corresponds to one of the tests.
3. Phillips Cables (today, Northern Cables) compared the numerical results of the earlier versions of
CYMCAP with experimental tests for cables in air [4]. The simulations very closely matched the measured
values; see the table below.

Conductor Temperature [C] Shield Temperature [C] Ampacity [A]

Actual CYMCAP Actual CYMCAP


90 76.0 73.6 810 817
130 102.0 102.6 1005 1004
Comparison of numerical and experimental results for cables in air

4. Verifications with a finite elements program were carried out in [3], the figure and table below show a duct
bank installation and the comparisons made with Massif, the finite elements program developed by IREQ
the research institute of Hydro Quebec.

5 – Steady State Thermal Analysis  63


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Cable Massif CYMCAP Difference


C C %
1 81.2 81.0 0.3
2 85.7 84.6 1.3
3 79.4 79.2 0.3
4 78.7 77.9 1.0
5 76.5 75.7 1.1
6 68.9 69.3 -0.6
7 72.4 72.1 0.5
8 68.3 67.7 0.8

Figure 2. Typical
Typical duct
duct bank bank
installation TableComparison
2. Comparison between
between CYMCAP andCymcap
Massif and
5. installation
The Massif
IEEE Standard 835-1994 (IEEE Standard Power Cable Ampacity Tables) gives very similar results to
the IEC Standards for underground cables. Differences are more noticeable for cables in air [5], but since
CYMCAP has been validated experimentally we believe that our results are closer to reality than those
published in the IEEE standard.
6. The ampacity and heat generated computed with CYMCAP was compared with a finite elements program
by ALCAN Cables and the Georgia Institute of Technology. The results were published in the IEEE
Transactions on Power Delivery in 2005 [6] and the table presented below has been extracted from the
paper.

Ampacity [A] Heat Generated [W/m]


Installation
CYMCAP Finite Elements CYMCAP Finite Elements
Single-Cable
1008 993 75.78 72.70
Directly Buried
Single-Cable
855 867 54.46 56.04
In Conduit
Three-Cables Directly Buried 666 678 102.4 106.4
Three-Cables
604 604 84.32 84.33
In Conduit
Comparison of CYMCAP and a finite elements program for directly buried cables

7. The book by George Anders [7] presents all the theoretical information supporting the numerical
algorithms implemented in CYMCAP.

References
[1] J.H. Neher and M.H. McGrath, “The Calculation of the Temperature Rise and Load Capability of
Cable Systems”, AIEE Transactions Part III - Power Apparatus and Systems, Vol. 76, October
1957, pp. 752-772.
[2] J.H. Neher, “The Transient Temperature Rise of Buried Cable Systems”, IEEE Transactions on
Power Apparatus and Systems, Vol. PAS-83, February 1964, pp. 102-114.

64  5 – Steady State Thermal Analysis


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

[3] Canadian Electrical Association, "Ampacity Calculation on Power Cables & Cyclic Loading for
Distribution Cables in Duck Bank – Volume I: Overview of the Technical and Experimental
Developments", Contract No. 138-D-375 and No. 137-D-374, October 1986
[4] Phillips Cables, "FIECAG Ampacity Program – Evaluation Phase I, Engineering Report No. 87-
30, December 1987.
[5] IEEE Standard Power Cable Ampacity Tables, IEEE Standard 835-1994.
[6] P. Vaucheret, R.A. Hartlein, and W.Z. Black, "Ampacity Derating Factors for Cables Buried in
Short Segments of Conduit", IEEE Transactions on Power Delivery, Vol. 20, No. 2, April 2005,
pp. 560-565.
[7] George Anders, “Rating of Electric Power Cables: Ampacity Computations for Transmission,
Distribution, and Industrial Applications”, IEEE Press, 1997, ISBN 0-7803-1177-9. It is now
available through McGraw-Hill only.

Studies and executions


A typical example of this categorization scheme is the case of analyzing the effect of bonding and/or
transposition for the sheaths of single core cables in a three-phase circuit. Although the basic installation
remains unaltered, one may define several executions each with different bonding arrangement to best
investigate the effects of bonding. When a study is created for the first time, an execution is also automatically
created.
S T U D IE S

S tu d y n o . 1 , S tu d y n o . 2 , ..............................S tu d y n o . x x , ....

E x e c u ti o n n o . 1 , ..n ........ E x e c u ti o n n o . 1 , ..n

A study may contain as many executions as needed.

5 – Steady State Thermal Analysis  65


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Library of studies and executions


Much like the various types of cables, the studies are kept in a separate library. This section describes how to
enter a new study in the library and how to manage an existing library of studies. Access to the library of
studies allows the user not only to add a new study but also to modify and even delete previously entered
ones.
The library of studies is accessed through the CYMCAP Navigator clicking on the Study tab. The top part of
the window displays the list of studies that can be expanded afterwards to show the executions that are part
of that study. To expand the list, double-click on the name of the study, or right-click to display the context-
sensitive menu and select Expand.

Studies are represented by a filing cabinet icon (closed when the branch is collapsed and open when
the branch is expanded). When the list is expanded, each execution is represented by a folder icon .

The bottom part of the window is a viewer used to display the executions. If you wish, you may hide this part
by checking the View installation checkbox; the list of studies will then occupy the complete space.
When an execution from the list is selected (or a study with only one execution) the installation will be
displayed in that window. This serves to avoid opening an execution to graphically see the installation.

66  5 – Steady State Thermal Analysis


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Four check boxes appear on the main window:

View execution This will show the execution number of the open execution screen (after clicking
number on Edit).
View cable(s) With this check box enabled, the list of cables part of the executions will be
installed for each displayed when the command Expand branch or Expand all will be selected from
execution the Study pop-up menu. (see below).
View installation To display or hide the graphical viewer pane at the bottom of the window.
Hide on edit Un-checking this box does not close the Navigator when an execution is being
edited.

To EDIT a study, select it and click on the Edit button to the right. Double clicking on the study will not resort
to editing since this function is reserved for expanding/collapsing the study. When a study is edited all
executions within the study are brought up for editing. Data pertaining to any execution can then be
modified accordingly.
To DELETE a study, select it and click on the Delete button to the right. When a study is deleted ALL the
executions belonging to this study will be deleted.
To CREATE a new study, select any study in the list and press the New Study button to the right. When a
new study is created, you have the choice to use the selected study as a template or to create a new
one from scratch. See Creating a study for details.
To CREATE a new execution within the study, select any existing execution as a template to create the new
execution. The highlighted execution will always be used as template unless the Start from scratch option is
checked in the New Study window.

5 – Steady State Thermal Analysis  67


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Study library pop-up menu

68  5 – Steady State Thermal Analysis


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Search Utility Allows finding a specific study, execution, or cable using alphanumeric string to filter
out the studies by name.
The library of studies can be quite voluminous. Once accessed, it can be difficult to
locate a particular study of interest. That is why CYMCAP features a search facility
that is activated with the right-click.

Once you click on the Find button, the program will perform the search and will “tag”
(symbol ) all entries that comprise the string searched for.

The search facility can be case sensitive. It is possible to ask the search facility to
maintain the tag on a previously tagged item even if it is not a result of the current
search. The search facility can be a forward/backward search based on the current
cursor position or can be a global search.
Note: performing a search will automatically enable the Tag mode. To disable it,
uncheck the corresponding checkbox in the CYMCAP utilities.
View All Selecting this option will list all the studies in the Study Library list.
View Tagged Only This is used to view the studies (and eventually the executions) that are “Tagged”.
The Tag mode needs to be turned on first. This is done through the CYMCAP
Utilities tab. The procedure of multiple selection is described in section Tag specific
items from the Libraries.
Sort by Study Id Sorts the displayed study entries on the list by Study ID. (The ID of a study is shown
between brackets to the left of the study name).
Sort by Study Title Sorts the displayed studies by study title.
Apply the Applies the option “IEC scope extended” to new studies and executions created
extended IEC hereafter.
scope option to
new
studies/executions

5 – Steady State Thermal Analysis  69


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Apply the Applies the option “IEC scope extended” to all existing executions of the database.
extended IEC
scope option to all
existing
executions
Remove the Disables the option “IEC scope extended” in all existing executions of the database.
extended IEC
scope option from
all existing
executions
Apply the Rac Applies the “Rac factor for magnetic ducts” option to new studies and executions
factor for created hereafter.
magnetic ducts
tonew
studies/executions
Apply the Rac Applies the “Rac factor for magnetic ducts” option to all existing executions of the
factor for database.
magnetic ducts to
all existing
executions
Cut Removes studies/executions to be copied into other studies
Copy Copies studies/executions
Paste Adds cut or copied studies/executions into other studies
Collapse Branch To hide the list of executions part of the study, which name is highlighted.
Expand Branch To display the list of executions part of the study, which name is highlighted. When
the View cable(s) installed for each execution checkbox is checked, the cables
part of each execution displayed with this command will also be displayed.
Collapse All To hide all the lists of executions part of the studies listed.
Expand All To display the list of executions part of all studies listed. When the View cable(s)
installed for each execution checkbox is checked, the cables part of each
execution displayed with this command will also be displayed.
Print Selected To print the list of executions of the study for which the name is highlighted in the list.
Branch…
Print only To print the list of only the studies which are expanded to show their executions.
Expanded
Branches…
Print All To print the complete list of studies, each with their list of executions.
Branches…
Resynchronize This function operates only in multi-user network licenses. It serves to refresh the list
of cables.

70  5 – Steady State Thermal Analysis


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Tag/UnTag To select (tag) or unselect (remove tag) a cable. Active when the Tag mode has
been enabled. See section: Tag specific items from the Libraries.
Tag All To select all cables in the view. Active when the Tag mode has been enabled. See
section: Tag specific items from the Libraries.
Untag All To unselect all cables. Active when the Tag mode has been enabled. See section:
Tag specific items from the Libraries.

Expanding a study is a convenient way to view the executions available for a particular study. Another
important piece of information is the type of cable(s) used within a given execution. CYMCAP offers the
possibility to access the cable types without resorting to detailed execution editing, thus circumventing the
necessity to memorize execution titles. Click on the button “View cable(s) installed for each execution”,
and the type of cables associated with the execution is shown.

The following icons are used to portray the various types of cables, as follows:

Single Core self-contained cables.

Pipe type cables cradled configuration within the pipe.

Pipe type cables triangular (trefoil) configuration within the pipe.

Three core self-contained cable.

Three core self-contained with sector-shaped conductors.

5 – Steady State Thermal Analysis  71


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Creating a study
Whenever you create a new study, your will have the choice of using the highlighted study in the list as a
template or to create a brand new one.

If you use the highlighted study as your template, you will be prompted to label that new study with a unique
study ID and Title only.
If you create a brand new study, you will be prompted to enter a short description of your execution no. 1 as
well.

In order to label a study and/or execution, you need to supply:

ID This is the unique Study ID. It consists in an alphanumeric string, 10 characters long. Use
different ID's for different studies for better study identification. CYMCAP uses the STUDY
ID for Data Base management purposes only.
Title This is the study title. It is an alphanumeric string 60 characters long to be used as the
study title. Use different titles for different studies, for better study identification. Used by
CYMCAP to list the various studies.
Execution This alphanumeric string of 60 characters long is used as the execution title. Different
Title executions should have different titles for better execution identification.
Comments This field is used to enter any additional important information that needs to be
remembered about a particular execution.

72  5 – Steady State Thermal Analysis


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Date When an execution is created, the date for the execution remains blank by default. The
user can indicate a specific date for an given execution using this command.
CYMCAP provides a calendar synchronized with the computer clock. Access it and any
desired date can be entered.

Executions within a study are internally numbered consecutively. To view the execution numbers when editing
one or more, you need to enable the appropriate option in the navigator screen; otherwise the execution
number is not displayed on the editing screen, but only the title is displayed.

5 – Steady State Thermal Analysis  73


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Analysis options
CYMCAP offers the three following analysis options:
1. Steady-State Thermal Analysis, for ampacity and/or temperature rise calculations when the cable
currents are not functions of time. For temperature rise calculations, the currents in the cables are
specified and temperatures are sought. For Ampacity calculations, the maximum permissible conductor
temperatures are entered and the cable currents are sought. Hybrid calculations are also supported. That
means that ampacities can be computed for several circuits while assuming fixed current values for the
remaining.
2. Cyclic Loading in CYMCAP can be performed as part of a steady state analysis. CYMCAP allows the
use of load factors. The load factor is used as per the two common cyclic loading approaches:
(1) Neher-McGrath
(2) IEC 60853

The default selection is the Neher-McGrath approach. The Cyclic Loading as per IEC 60853, which is
only available for identical cables of the same load factor and equally loaded, can be selected manually
through Options->Preferences->Cyclic Loading.

There are important differences between the two approaches and the user should be aware that different
results are expected. The Neher-McGrath approach considers cyclic loading by adjusting T4 (the external
thermal resistance of the cable), while the IEC 60853 uses a cyclic factor M to modify the steady-state
current computed at unity load factor. Moisture migration is supported in both cases.
3. TRANSIENT ANALYSIS, for calculations where the cable loading is a function of time, and/or where
transient conditions are sought. Transient calculations must be preceded by Steady State analysis.
No transient analysis is supported for installations of cables in air and in the presence of moisture
migration.
The remaining sections in this Chapter covers at length the Steady State Thermal Analysis options, while
Chapter 6 covers the complete subject of Transient Analysis.

74  5 – Steady State Thermal Analysis


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Steady state analysis


In the first stage of a steady state analysis, the user is prompted for the specific analysis option that is to be
applied. The choice of this option determines the data to be asked for the cable installation.
The Steady state analysis options available in CYMCAP are:

EQUALLY If the installation comprises cables carrying the same current.


1
LOADED

2 UNEQUALLY If the installation comprises cables which carry different currents.


LOADED
In options 1 and 2 the maximum allowable conductor temperature is specified and the program
calculates the cables’ ampacities.

3 TEMPERATURE If the conductor currents are known and the temperatures are sought.

In this option the cable currents are specified and the program calculated the cables’ temperatures.

Note: Only the Unequally Loaded option supports fixed ampacity circuits, i.e. circuits with pre-
determined loading that won’t be affected by the ampacity search.

The following subsections explain in detail the data to be considered when preparing a steady-state analysis:
 General data for the installation
 Cable Installation data
 Specific cable installation data
The functionalities offered by CYMCAP for steady-state analyses are illustrated with some examples listed
below. These study cases outline several major analysis options of the program. The basic interface aspects
of CYMCAP associated with these analysis options are also presented.
 Steady state thermal analysis, Example 1: Cables in a duct bank
 A study case for dissimilar directly buried cables
 Specific installation data

5 – Steady State Thermal Analysis  75


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

General data for the installation


Ambient temperature and soil resistivity
Ambient temperature and soil resistivity values should reflect the actual installation situation and not
necessarily correspond to the test condition of the manufacturer.
Ambient temperature for buried cables is the soil ambient temperature at the cable burial depth. It is the air
ambient temperature if the cables are installed in air.
Soil thermal resistivities range, typically, from 0.8 to 1.3 K·m/W. Values as low as 0.4 and as high as 4
K·W/m can also be encountered. The thermal resistivity of the soil is a very important factor affecting cable
ampacity, particularly for directly buried cables. The higher the soil thermal resistivity, the lower is the
ampacity, for a given maximum permissible conductor temperature. Thermal resistivity increases with
decreasing moisture content in the soil. The thermal resistivity of dry sand can be as high as 5 K·m/W, while,
thermal resistivity of dry crushed limestone, usually, cannot be higher than 1.5 K·m/W. Soil thermal resistivity
is also inversely proportional to the degree of soil compaction.
If the soil thermal resistivity is unknown, the value of 1.3 can be used as an average conservative estimate.
The IEEE Standard 442-1981, “IEEE Guide for Soil Thermal Resistivity Measurements” provides a procedure
to measure the thermal resistivity of the soil. Some of the materials listed in the standard are given in the table
below.

Thermal Resistivity
Material
[K·m/W)
Quartz Grains 0.11
Granite Grains 0.26
Limestone Grains 0.45
Sandstone Grains 0.58
Mica Grains 1.70
Water 1.65
Organic Wet 4.00
Organic Dry 7.00
Air 40.00

Non isothermal earth surface modeling


Non-isothermal Surface Modeling may be necessary in cases where the cables are buried relatively close
to the earth surface as the usual isothermal earth surface assumption could yield rather optimistic results.
Actually, when cables are buried shallowly, the temperature of the earth surface close to the cables increases
due to the heat dissipated from these cables. This yields a non-homogeneous temperature distribution at the
earth surface which can no longer accurately be considered as an isotherm.
When non-isothermal earth surface modeling is selected, the program requires the air ambient temperature
rather than the soil ambient temperature. The usual Ambient Temperature field is greyed out and hence, is
not used during the computations.
Instead, the Air ambient temperature is used as the reference temperature for the computation of the cables’
temperature rise. Additionally, the Air ambient temperature is used to determine the convection coefficient at
the earth/air interface.
The non-isothermal earth surface model is however not applicable under the following circumstances:
- if, for at least one cable (or heat source), d/L > 0.4, where d is defined in section, Methodology and
computational standards’ and L is the depth of burial of the cable closest to the earth surface. In this

76  5 – Steady State Thermal Analysis


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

case, no computation is performed. The program returns an error as neither the non-isothermal nor
the isothermal model is applicable.
- If, for the shallowest cable of the installation, L/De > 10, where L is the depth of burial of the
shallowest cable and De is its external diameter. In such case, the program automatically reverts to
the default isothermal computations with the ambient air temperature used as reference. A warning
message is prompted at the end of the computations to advise the user that the model has been
switched to an isothermal earth surface model.

Moisture migration modeling


Moisture Migration in the vicinity of the cable surface, also referred to as "drying out of soil", can also be
taken into account, in order to model a change in the soil moisture content around the cable when a specific
critical temperature is exceeded. In this case, the user will be asked to enter the thermal resistivity of the dry
zone around the cable.
The dry soil thermal resistivity value is larger than the one usually assumed in moist conditions and can be as
high as 4.0 K·m/W. A typical value for the critical temperature at which moisture migration occurs is 50°C. The
IEEE standard 442 provides curves of soil thermal resistivity versus moisture content.

Notes:  Moisture migration is only supported for directly buried cables.


 No transient analysis can be carried out in the presence of moisture migration.

Surrounding medium of the installation


This is to specify whether the cables are directly buried, in backfill, ducts or in air. Depending on the particular
installation, the following additional data may be necessary:

Backfill/Ductbank data
Backfill data pertain to thermal backfills and duct banks. The basic version of the program cannot handle
more than two different materials surrounding the cable. Through the MDB add-on module described in
Chapter 3 of the Additional Modules reference manual the user can model up to 12 materials or regions with
different thermal resistivities. Rectangular backfills/duct banks are the only types supported by the basic
program. The MDB add-on module also allows the modeling of soil layers. Its dimensions and thermal
resistivity characterize a backfill or a duct bank. The thermal resistivity of the backfill is usually lower than the
native soil. The thermal resistivity of concrete is usually in the range of 0.5 to 0.8 K·m/W.
The coordinates for the Backfill/Duct bank center must be based on the same reference axes as the cable
coordinates. It is emphasized, again that no moisture migration is supported when the cables are
contained in a backfill or duct bank.

5 – Steady State Thermal Analysis  77


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Caution 1. The permitted duct bank width/height ratio in the Neher-McGrath method goes
Notes: from 1/3 to 3. If the entered width and height values give a greater or smaller
ratios CYMCAP uses published extensions obtained with finite elements
Since there is a change of calculation method when exceeding the upper or lower
limit, users performing parametric studies might find that the computed ampacity
behaves strangely. The results obtained from the extension formula are
considered to be more accurate
2. Please be aware that in both cases, the Neher-McGrath and the extensions, it is
assumed that the duct bank or backfill surface is an isothermal. This assumption
most probably is not true for very large or small ratios of width to height (larger
than 5). Also the assumption might not be fulfilled when the duct bank/backfill is
close to the surface. Please use the results having the mentioned limitations in
mind.
3. To avoid the problems described in points (1) and (2) the calculations can be
accurately performed with the Multiple Duct Bank (/MDB) add-on module.

Cables in air
When cables are installed in air, besides the data pertinent to solar radiation, the program needs to know if
any special cable arrangement applies.
SOLAR RADIATION MODELING is supported only for the case the cables are installed in air and are
"unshaded". The user needs to enter the following information:
1. Intensity of solar radiation in W/m2, or in W/ft2. The value depends on the latitude and altitude of the
installation, the day of the year and the sky conditions. CYMCAP can compute the intensity of solar
radiation when it is unknown (see below).
2. Absorption coefficient for the cable surface material. The following are typical values for various
materials:
Compounded jute/fibrous materials ABSC = 0.8
Polycholoroprene ABSC = 0.8
Polyvinylchloride ABSC = 0.6
Polyethylene ABSC = 0.4
Lead or armour ABSC = 0.6
Steel ABSC = 0.55

3. For cables installed in air, the load factor has to be 1.0.

78  5 – Steady State Thermal Analysis


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

CYMCAP has a facility to compute the solar radiation intensity for a given location using the ASHRAE
Clear Day Solar Flux Model published originally in the ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals. Several
known improvements have been made for its inclusion in CYMCAP. When clicking on Compute solar
radiation in the Cables in Air dialog box, a new dialog box will open to enter the geographical and date
information in order to obtain the intensity of solar radiation for the specified location, day and sky
conditions.

5 – Steady State Thermal Analysis  79


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

SUPPORTED CONFIGURATIONS FOR CABLES INSTALLED IN AIR.


The following table illustrates the cases that CYMCAP supports for cables near or clipped to walls. The
necessary assumptions concerning clearances are also tabulated. These cases are directly taken from the
IEC 60287 standard.

For configurations 1 to 10 outlined in the figure, the following applies:


 Cables are assumed in free air or non-continuous brackets, ladder supports or cleats.
 “De" is not greater than 0.15m.
 Values for 1 cable also apply to each cable of a group when spaced horizontally, with a clearance
between cables of at least 0.75 times the overall cable diameter.

Groups of cables in air per IEC 60287-2-2


The available choices for groups of cables in air are shown in the figure below. These configurations have
been obtained from the IEC standard 60287-2-2. The calculating procedures contained in IEC 60287-2-2
have been modified to take into account solar radiation.

80  5 – Steady State Thermal Analysis


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Note: All the cables must have the same Cable ID.

Cables on riser poles


Cables on riser poles are installed in vertical arrangements with a guard to provide mechanical protection.
These guards act as ducts for thermal analysis purposes. However, since the heat transfer mechanisms are
different for those arrangements, as compared to horizontally placed ducts, in order to avoid overestimation of
the ampacities for cables on risers, CYMCAP uses a dedicated methodology to treat cables on riser poles.
As the following table indicates, the program supports both-ends vented guards, partially vented (open at the
top) and completely closed risers. The possibility of having 1 or 3 cables in the riser guard is also supported
for all three cases.
When magnetic risers are considered, all 3 phases must be present. In other words, we can either have:
1. 3 single-core cables in trefoil within the same duct,
2. 1 three-core cable in a duct,
3. 3 single-core cables in 3 different ducts spaced apart.
For the former 2 cases, enter in Cable installation data the coordinates of the center of the duct, while for
the third case all three cables must be explicitly entered, respecting their spacing.
For 3 single-core cables in the same duct, select the appropriate icon (2, 4 or 6) and enter only one cable in
the cable installation data. The program will assume that 3 cables in trefoil are considered. The icons shown
for cables on riser poles are generic. Thus, a 3-core cable can also be modeled in the guard by selecting
icons 1, 3 or 5, despite the fact that the icons portray single-core cables.

Heat Sink(s)/Source(s) Modeling


This option can be exercised to model nearby heat source(s) (or heat sink(s)) that is suspected to be
influencing the ampacity calculations. This can be used for nearby steam pipes, waterbeds etc. There are four
possibilities:
1. Source inside backfill specified as constant temperature.
2. Source inside backfill specified as heat flux source.
3. Source not in backfill specified as constant temperature.

5 – Steady State Thermal Analysis  81


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

4. Source not in backfill specified as constant heat flux.


Heat flux is expressed in W/m2 and temperature in °C.
Heat sources are modeled as circles with either constant temperature or constant heat flux boundaries. When
therefore a source is specified, the source coordinates and the diameter are the data required. If the source is
in backfill, make certain that the source circumference falls within the backfill. Similarly, if the source is
specified outside the backfill make sure that the source circumference stays completely out of the backfill. No
hybrid geometrical situations are recommended.

An insulation layer can be added to a heat source (heat sink) when the temperature is specified for steady
state ampacity or temperature simulations. Heat sources are supported in transients, but with no insulating
layer.

Note: When an insulation layer is present around the heat source, the temperature to be
provided for the constant temperature model is the one inside the heat source and
not the temperature at the surface.

Multiple cables per phase


Some installations feature more than one cable, in parallel, per phase. This is normally due to the fact that the
load per phase may be too high to be carried by a single cable. We may therefore have 2, 3 or more cables
per phase. When single core cables are connected in parallel, the load current may not share equally
between them, due to the fact that the associated impedances are not only a function of the self but of the
mutual inductance between cables and their sheath which is dependent on the geometrical arrangement.
Similar considerations apply for the circulating currents in their sheaths for 2-point bonded systems. In
calculating ampacities for cables in parallel, different sheath loss factors are involved. Their value depends
not only on the cable location, but also on the phase labeling as well.
Modeling installations that involve several cables per phase by assuming every parallel path to be an
independent circuit entails an error because this will disregard the mutual impedances between sheaths of the
same circuit and could result in overestimating the cable ampacities.

82  5 – Steady State Thermal Analysis


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Notes:  All the cables for multiple cables per phase will have to be the same cable type
when they belong to the same circuit. Different circuits can, however, have
different cable types.
 Multiple cables per phase cannot be applied on 3-core cables.
 The notion of transposition, cross-bonding and minor section lengths as well as
specifying section length for 2-point bonded systems are not applicable.

Cable Installation data


This part of data entry pertains to the geometrical coordinates of the cables used in the installation and
comprises labeling and cable numbering conventions the application abides by. Depending on the analysis
option selected for steady state analysis, conductor temperatures may need to be entered instead of
conductor currents.

Geometrical configuration of the installation


The geometrical location of the cables, i.e. their coordinates is necessary.
The Y-coordinate value for the cables is always assumed to be positive and designates the depth of
burial with respect to the earth surface which is assumed at Y=0.0. For cables installed in air, Y can be set to
0.
The X-coordinate values can be either positive or negative. The choice of the origin of the X-axis should
be governed, whenever possible, by the ease of entering cable coordinates. It is common for installations to
exhibit symmetry along a vertical axis. Choose this vertical axis to be the X-axis reference. This will at first
greatly facilitate entering the coordinates (half the cables will be mirror images of the other half) and at second
it will ease the convergence process.

Notes:  Entering x and y coordinates for every cable is not always necessary since in
some cases only the distances between the various cables are of importance. In
other cases, the coordinates of one cable only are necessary, while the rest can
be deduced from the cables spacing.
 CYMCAP also allows the user to enter the coordinates for a cable in relative
coordinates by designating any cable in the installation as the “beacon cable”.

Additional salient aspects of Cable Installation Data


 Only cables of the same type can share the same circuit number. Additionally if the circuit is three-phased
(A, B, C) the number of cables has to be a multiple of three.
 Only single phase and three-phase circuits can be modeled.
 A maximum of 300 cables can be entered per installation.
 In the Cable Installation Data window the cable is identified with its cable ID which is the ID used in the
cable library. Only cables previously created in the library can be added to an installation as will be shown
in the examples that follow. Cables with the same circuit number must have the same cable ID.

5 – Steady State Thermal Analysis  83


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Cable Installation types


CYMCAP supports the following types of cable installations:
 Cables in air
 Cables in duct/pipe in air.
 Cables directly buried in soil.
 Cables buried in thermal backfill.
 Cables in an underground duct bank.
 Cables in duct/pipe directly buried in soil.
 Cables in duct/pipe buried in thermal backfill.
 Cables installed in multiple duct banks, multiple backfills and/or multiple soil layers with different thermal
resistivities*.
 Cables in tunnels*
 Cables in filled or unfilled troughs*
 Cables in casings buried in soil or laid in water or in a silt*
This information is used to direct the program for any additional data required. Pipe-type cables are always
assumed to be three-conductor cables.
* Those installations are add-on modules. For more information see details in the Additional Modules
reference manual.

Specific cable installation data


This data is used to provide further details about the installation pertaining to specific cable types used in the
installation.
An installation may have many cables, but only a few types of cables. Specific installation data have to be
entered for every cable type. Once specific installation data is specified for one cable type, the information
remains for all cables of this type in the installation.
When an execution is duplicated and the cable types are changed, the user should always specify the specific
installation data for all the new cable types. The program will not assume any specific installation data.

Bonding
The bonding arrangement is a very important factor for ampacity calculations. When the cable sheaths are
bonded and grounded at both ends, large circulating currents result, which may considerably decrease the
permissible cable ampacity.
For cross bonded (with regular bonding intervals) and single-point bonded systems, only eddy current losses
are present (continuous cylindrical sheaths assumed). These losses are much lower than the losses due to
the circulating currents in the sheaths when bonded and grounded at both ends. For single-point bonded
systems, standing voltages arise usually at the open end. This voltage can be of concern, particularly for
personal safety, and can be computed by the program.
The following figure shows the differences between two-point (also referred to as multiple-point bonding or
bonded ends) the single-point bonding arrangements and cross bonded sheaths.

84  5 – Steady State Thermal Analysis


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Two-Point (multi-point) Bonding

Single Point Bonding

Cross Bonding

5 – Steady State Thermal Analysis  85


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Crossbonding can be applied with equal or unequal section lengths. In the former case, circulating currents
are the minimum while in the latter some circulating currents may exist. In the case of unequal section
lengths, the program requests the user to use the length of the shortest section as reference and define the
remaining two sections (longer and longest) by using the length ratios longer/shortest (q) and longest/shortest
(p) to quantify the degree of asymmetry and thus calculate the circulating currents in the sheaths accordingly.
Concentric wires shields and sheath reinforcement assemblies follow the bonding option selected for the
sheaths. For single-point bonded and cross-bonded systems only sheath and sheath reinforcement eddy
currents are considered as losses. Armour wires are always assumed to be bonded and grounded at both
ends. Non-magnetic armour is combined with the sheath for circulating current loss computations. Non-
magnetic armour wires, in the absence of a sheath should always be modeled as concentric neutral
wires.
Since it is not always possible to install cables with one value of spacing along a given route, the program
supports unequal spacing of cables. The following relate to the calculation of sheath circulating current losses
for 2-point bonded systems when a situation like this occurs. A section is defined as the length along two
points of the cable route where shields are solidly bonded. Loss factors have to be calculated based on
conductor and external thermal resistance of the closest cable spacing along the section.
1. When spacing along a section is not constant but the various lengths are known, the value for X are
derived as per IEC 60287 as follows:

where:
 La, Lb,..., Ln are lengths of different spacing along a section and Xa, Xb,..., Xn the reactances per unit
length of cable, with appropriate values for the corresponding spacing Sa, Sb,..., Sn.
 It is assumed that the cables are in flat formation. Note that the same considerations are also
applicable for single core cables arranged in triangular formation. S is the spacing between either one
of the outer cables to the middle cable. Here the spacing of the two outer cables is assumed to be
equal. If not, enter the GMD (geometric mean distance).
2. If the spacing of cables along a section are not known or cannot be really anticipated in the preliminary
design stages, the losses will be considered increased by 25%. This is considered to be a typical value.

Details about cable configuration


 All non-magnetic metallic tape screen of a cable should be modeled as a sheath layer or a non-magnetic
tape armor depending on the cable configuration. All non-magnetic metallic wire screen of a cable should
be modeled as a concentric neutral wires layer or as a non-metallic wire armor depending on the cable
configuration.
 Eddy losses in wire screens are always neglected.

Barring certain bonding options


Bonding arrangements need to be defined for every cable type within the installation. Depending on the
geometrical disposition of the cable layouts the application may bar certain bonding arrangements as a
precaution to invalid data entry. For instance, triplexed formations will not be permitted to be assigned
bonding options pertinent to flat arranged cables. Non-accessible bonding options are shown with the Pad-
lock option, the same symbol used for invalid selections in the cable library.

86  5 – Steady State Thermal Analysis


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Cables touching
The program supports the following options:
 Single conductor (core) cable
 Single conductor (core) cables touching
The program will automatically assign the correct option to the circuit configuration.

Cable transposition
The transposition of single conductor cables reduces the circulating currents in the sheaths when cables are
bonded at both ends and they are arranged in flat formation. Both options are supported:
 Cables are regularly transposed
 Cables not transposed
This consideration is relevant only when the single-core cables are specified as being two point bonded.
Furthermore, the specification of transposition bears no relevance for the case one single conductor per cable
is specified. Single core cables in triangular formation are assumed transposed. The notion of transposition is
only applicable to three-phase circuits composed of 1 single core cable per phase.

Duct bank/duct materials and construction


When cables are installed in ducts, CYMCAP supports the calculation of the external thermal resistance as a
function of the duct construction. The following choices are supported: (duct thermal resistivity K·m/W) can
be user supplied or selected from the list below.

Material
Metallic conduit (non-magnetic) 0.0
Metallic conduit (magnetic) 0.0
Fiber duct in air 4.8
Fiber duct in concrete 4.8
Asbestos duct in air 2.0
Asbestos duct in concrete 2.0
PVC duct in air 6.0
PVC duct in concrete 6.0
Polyethylene duct in air 3.5
Polyethylene duct in concrete 3.5
Earthenware duct 1.2
Concrete duct 1.2
High pressure gas filled pipe type 0.0
High pressure oil filled pipe type 0.0

Note: The duct/duct bank material, along with its dimensions, is used to determine some
constants necessary for the computation of the external thermal resistance of the cable.
The user has the possibility to provide a custom thermal resistivity for the duct material,
by selecting Custom Duct Material. The duct construction, however, MUST BE one of
the 12 listed above. For example, if the case at hand exhibits asbestos ducts in air and
the thermal resistivity of the asbestos variant used is different than the one tabulated in
entry 4 above, the user can supply the required asbestos thermal resistivity by selecting
Custom Duct Material, but the option asbestos ducts in air must be selected.

5 – Steady State Thermal Analysis  87


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Induced currents in metallic layers as a fraction of conductor currents for single


phase circuit
For single-phase circuits, CYMCAP does not yet have the necessary theory to compute losses in the metallic
layers surrounding the conductor (sheath, reinforcement tape, concentric wires, armour) in case circulating
currents are induced by the alternating current flowing in the conductor. The purpose of this input data is to
allow users to define the amount of circulating currents present in those metallic layers surrounding
the core, either induced by the core conductor or as a return current of the circuit. Users should know that the
data is used only to evaluate losses due to circulating currents. Induced eddy losses and/or effects of
magnetic layers are not considered in the computation. The data is defined in p.u. of the conductor current
and cannot exceed 1. A value of 0 means that there is no current circulating in the layers and
consequentlyno losses are computed.

Notes:  This is an important input as the higher the circulating losses in those layers around
the central conductor, the lower the final ampacity.
 This quantity is only pertinent in presence of single-phase circuits and must be
provided if the default value is not acceptable (default is 0.0).

Pipe material and dimensions


For pipe-type cables, the pipe material is used to calculate the multiplier for the so-called "in-pipe-effect". This
multiplier is used to take into account losses due to proximity and eddy currents because of the presence of
the pipe.
The following choices are supported:
1. User supplies pipe material. In this case the user has to enter the coefficient PIPFAC for the "in-pipe-
effect".
2. Stainless steel pipe, PIPFAC=1.0
3. Steel pipe, PIPFAC=1.5
4. Iron pipe, PIPFAC=1.5
The pipe dimensions support not only the regular pipe dimensions, but also a provision for coating is made.
The user can specify any coating material. If custom made, (user supplies material), the thermal resistivity
has to be given to the program, although normally the selection can be made from the same list of the
materials used for the jacket. In this case, the program has embedded thermal resistivities for the listed
materials. When specifying the dimensions, the overall pipe diameter has to be larger than the outer pipe
diameter in order to model the pipe coating. If no pipe coating material is present, the overall pipe diameter
has to be entered equal to the outer pipe diameter.

88  5 – Steady State Thermal Analysis


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Cable Library data and executions


When an execution is run, the cable data used for the particular simulation are the ones contained within the
execution. CYMCAP keeps a copy of the Cable Library data that could be modified locally within the
execution. The data of the cable library will remain unaltered. That is why when an execution is saved, the
user is presented with the following options:

Save As Is If the current execution is not new, then it already contains previously entered cable design
data. This option will conserve the existing data no matter what the status of the
cable library. If the execution was created just now, and no cable design data exist within
the execution, the program will take the data from the cable library.
Update When this option is exercised, the program will update the cable data for this execution
From from the cable library. This option is useful when a cable design has been modified in the
Library library and we desire to import the necessary changes in the pertinent execution.
Update To We exercise this option when the cable design data performed within the execution are
Library to be used to update the cable library. Note that if the same cables are used in other
studies or executions, the cables are not updated automatically.

5 – Steady State Thermal Analysis  89


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Steady state thermal analysis, Example 1: Cables in a


duct bank
In this study case, the basic steps for setting up a case with cables in a duct bank are illustrated. The cable
type to be used is already in the library. If this were not the case the first task would be to create the
cable and save it in the library.
The study parameters are as follows:
 Six single-phase cables, composing two 3-phase circuits, located in ducts within a duct bank are
considered.
 The cables are 30kV, 1000KCMIL, CU conductor, CU concentric neutral, XLPE insulated cables.
 The duct bank is made of concrete and the cables are assumed to operate at 75% load factor.
 This study will assume that all the cables are of the same type and that are equally loaded.
 The maximum conductor temperature will be assumed to be 90°C. The frequency will be 60 Hz and the
unit system will be the Metric one.
 All 6 cables are of the same type; therefore only 1 cable type will be used for the installation.
The following aspects of CYMCAP are illustrated through this example:
 Defining a new study and a new execution.
 Setting the steady state analysis solution Option.
 Using the Execution bar and associated command buttons within an execution.
 Using the duct bank library for cables installed in a duct bank, including:
 Defining standard and/or non-standard duct banks.
 Importing a duct bank from the Library .
 Defining the general installation data and setup.
 Defining the cable installation data and entering the geometrical installation data.
 Rearranging the cables in the proper ducts.
 Why it is not necessary to explicitly enter the cables coordinates for duct bank installations.
 How to define specific installation data for the cables within an installation.
 How to generate graphical and tabular reports for a given execution.
 How to access the cable design data graphically from the installation layout.
 How to access graphical reports from the installation layout.
 How to interpret the generated tabular reports for steady state analysis.

90  5 – Steady State Thermal Analysis


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Defining a new study and a new execution


We enter the CYMCAP Navigator and make certain that the frequency is set to 60 Hz and that the Unit
system is set to Metric. To change the frequency, double-click on the frequency command in the status bar
(Fq= …) and type in the frequency in the dialog box that will be displayed. To change the unit system, double-
click on the word Metric or Imperial that appears next to the frequency in the status bar. Double-clicking
toggles between the two unit systems.

We then create a brand new study. Click on the New Study button in the Study Navigator page. The
program will give you the choice of using the highlighted study as the template (Yes), or to start with a blank
study (No). For this example, click on No.

5 – Steady State Thermal Analysis  91


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Setting the steady state analysis solution Option


Click on OK to display the Solution Option dialog box. We select Equally Loaded, since there is only one
cable type in the installation and we desire all circuits to have the same ampacity, and click OK.

The program then prompts the user for the generic installation type by displaying the Execution bar.

92  5 – Steady State Thermal Analysis


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Execution bar and associated command buttons


Before proceeding, let us examine the contents of the Execution bar. This toolbar features the quick access
commands to important activities within the execution. The same functions can be accessed from the
CYMCAP menu. Depending on whether the execution is a new execution, some (or all) will be enabled. More
specifically:

Multiple Duct Banks module (MDB) icon – To create an MDB installation or access and edit the
General installation data. MDB is an optional add-on to CYMCAP designed to determine the
steady state ampacity of cables installed in several neighboring duct banks and/or backfills with
different thermal resistivities. The presentation of the remaining of this chapter assumes that the
MDB module is not present.
Duct bank installation icon– To create a duct bank installation or access and edit the General
installation data. It pertains to cables installed within a duct bank. All the cables of the installation
must be contained within the duct bank.
Backfill installation icon– To create a backfill installation or access and edit the General
installation data. It pertains to the cables installed within a backfill. All the cables of the installation
must be contained within the backfill.
Directly buried installation icon– To create a directly buried installation or access and edit the
General installation data. It pertains to cables installed as directly buried. All the cables of the
installation must be directly buried.

5 – Steady State Thermal Analysis  93


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Buried ducts installation icon– To create a buried duct installation or access and edit the
General installation data. It pertains to cables installed in buried ducts. All the cables of the
installation must be contained within buried ducts.
Buried pipes installation icon– To create a buried pipe installation or access and edit the
General installation data. It pertains to pipe type cables that are directly buried. The installation
must contain at least one pipe-type cable. All the cables of the installation must be directly
buried.
Cables in air installation icon – To create a cables in air installation or access and edit the
General installation data. It pertains to cables installed in air. All the cables of the installation
must be installed in air.
Tunnel installation icon – To create a tunnel installation or access and edit the General
installation data. It pertains to cables installed in a tunnel. All the cables of the installation must
be installed inside a tunnel.
Filled/unfilled trough installation icon – To create a filled/unfilled trough installation or access
and edit the General installation data. Filled/Unfilled trough is an optional add-on to CYMCAP.
The Filled Trough installation is a part of the Multiple Duct Banks module (MDB), and the Unfilled
Trough (UNF) installation module is an independent add-on module.
Heat Source element icon – Access the heat source/heat sink description form.

Solver icon – Submit the execution and start the computations. When this icon is clicked on,
only the current execution of the study is submitted.

Zoom in mode icon – Zoom in on the cables within the installation display window. Zooming-in
can, under certain circumstances, distort the proportions kept by CYMCAP for the various
installation components since they are drawn under scale.
Zoom out mode icon – Zoom out of the cables within the installation display window. Zooming-
out restores the normal view and the program reverts to the state before zooming-in.

Multiple ductbanks/backfills installation data icon – Active only when the MDB module is
installed.

Installation data icon – To create or edit the Cable Installation data. These data comprise
geometrical layout of cables within the installation, cable types used, circuit arrangements, etc.

Specific installation data icon – To create or edit the Specific cable installation data. These
data comprise information on bonding, transposition etc. Every cable type used in the installation
must have its own Specific Installation Data.
Sensitivity Analysis icon – Opens the Sensitivity Analysis (or Peak ratings) facility of CYMCAP.
This icon is only active for Temperature runs; see Chapter 8.

Transient Analysis data icon – Access the definition form for transient analysis properties. This
icon is only active if the Transient Analysis option has been checked under Edit->Solution Option.

Cable Design Data icon – Edit the Cable design data as entered in the Cable Library. This icon
gives access to the Cable Library module for all the cable types within the current execution.
Used to modify the cable design data locally, within the execution.

94  5 – Steady State Thermal Analysis


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Defining standard and/or non-standard duct banks

Click on the Ductbank installation icon to call for a duct bank installation. The program displays
another prompt to inquire whether a regular duct bank or not is to be used.

Standard duct banks are duct banks featuring symmetrical arrangements of duct rows and columns.
Asymmetrical duct banks feature arbitrary duct placement geometry within the duct bank. Click No to indicate
that a regular duct bank is to be selected from the Duct bank library.

5 – Steady State Thermal Analysis  95


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Importing a duct bank from the Library


Once a standard duct bank is selected, the duct bank library becomes accessible under the Library drop
down list. Any duct bank from the library can be selected and imported in the installation. It is important at this
point to specify the depth at which the duct bank will be placed. Here, the depth is specified by the duct bank
center, but the top or the bottom can also be used to set its location.

96  5 – Steady State Thermal Analysis


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Defining the general installation data and setup


Click the Apply button at the bottom of the Ductbank Library dialog box to display the Ductbank
installation dialog box into which you will enter the General data for the installation. The pertinent information
is shown below:

Enter your general data and click OK, the program will then display the Installation Setup window.
The following figure illustrates the possible cable configurations. Some options might not be active depending
on the type of installation.
This is where you will enter the cables/circuits the installation includes. The simulation under consideration
features 6 single core cables, in 2 circuits. The maximum conductor temperature is 90 degrees C and the
circuit Load factor 0.75.
The conductor temperature and Load factor shown will be applied initially to all cables in the
installation. They can later be modified on a per circuit basis.

5 – Steady State Thermal Analysis  97


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Defining the cable installation data


Click on OK in the Installation Setup dialog box and CYMCAP displays the Cable installation workbench.

By default CYMCAP has positioned the 6 cables in ducts sequentially by filling the duct bank row by row. A
red X marks the positions the program placed the cables in the duct bank. The left part of the screen
comprises the cable installation data i.e. the cable positions, the maximum temperature and the circuit layout.
The symbol for the circuit layout clearly indicate that we deal with single core cables having one cable per
duct.
If other circuit arrangements were chosen different symbols would appear for the circuit layout. More
specifically:

Single core cable located at the displayed coordinates.

Trefoil formation which center is located at the displayed coordinates.

Three-core cable located at the displayed coordinates.

98  5 – Steady State Thermal Analysis


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

We need to specify now the cable types that will be used. Select any cable of the first circuit (or select all the
cables of the circuit) and double-click on it. The Cable library browser replaces the Installation data dialog
box.

Selecting any cable type from the library is thus possible, with simultaneous visualization of the cable cross-
section within the browser. Furthermore, by activating the Library cable filter the search can be narrowed
down to pertinent cables only (e.g. single core). Select the desired cable and click OK to import it to the
installation. Note that CYMCAP will first verify if the selected cable fits in the duct.
Any duct showing an X symbol means that the cable is too large for the conduit.

5 – Steady State Thermal Analysis  99


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Rearranging the cables in the proper ducts


As seen, the application placed the cable arbitrarily, filling completely the upper row of the duct bank and
moving on to the second row sequentially. Most probably this is not the desired cable positioning, then click
on the button Permute cables to rearrange the cables as desired by pointing and dragging any cable to the
desired location.

Once the desired positioning is achieved, click on the button Apply at the bottom of the graphical display to
accept the changes.
The final position of the cables is shown in the installation screen.

100  5 – Steady State Thermal Analysis


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Since the cables in a duct bank installation need to be inside the conduits, CYMCAP can easily find the
appropriate location of the cables because the possibilities are finite. In other types of installations this is not
possible and the user needs to specify the x, y location of every cable.

Rapidly change installation data information through data grid


Click on button “Installation data grid…” as show below.

To change any value by circuit just enter value on the row identify by the circuit number. Enter a new feeder
name for circuit 1 and name it FEEDER A. Do the same for circuit 2 and name it FEEDER B.

5 – Steady State Thermal Analysis  101


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

To change values for all cables, just enter values on the row called “APPLY TO ALL”. For example, enter
100.0 for conductor temperature and 0.75 for load factor. Click APPLY to refresh changes in the grid and click
OK to accept changes.

A study case for dissimilar directly buried cables


For this example we will consider one trefoil formation of single core cables (350KCMIL, 15kV rated), three
single core cables (350KCMIL, 46kV rated submarine cables) in flat formation and one 3-core (250 KCMIL,
69kV rated) cable, directly buried in the ground. The installation therefore features 3 circuits and 3 different
types of cables.
The maximum permissible conductor temperatures for the 15kV and 46kV submarine cable circuits shall be
assumed to be 90°C, while their respective Load factors are 0.75. The 69 kV circuit will be assumed to have a
fixed ampacity of 140.00 A at a load factor of 1.00. An irrigation pipe, having 150 cm diameter is in the vicinity,
carrying water. The pipe will be modeled as a heat sink having a temperature of 10°C. The ampacities of the
first two circuits are sought. The Unit system will be the Imperial system and the operating frequency shall be
assumed to be 60 Hz.
In analyzing this case, the following CYMCAP options are illustrated:
 Define a new execution using an existing one as a template.
 Define a new execution starting from scratch.
 Modify the solution option from the CYMCAP Menu.
 How to enter in the installation cables using relative coordinates with respect to already entered cables.
 How to enter in the installation cables arranged in a trefoil formation.
 How to designate a reference circuit when dissimilar cables are considered for the installation.
 How to perform steady state analysis when one circuit in the installation has a fixed load carrying
capacity.
 How to model external heat sources.
 How to view the reports for cables arranged in a trefoil formation.

Define a new execution using an existing one as template


We can proceed as in example 1 and define a new study with a new execution in it. An alternative manner is
to use the existing execution for duct banks and create a new one within the same study. If the former way is
selected, the steps that need to be followed have already been described. If the latter approach is followed,
the old installation data need to be deleted and a new installation to be built anew. In both cases the solution
option must be specified, in fact changed, to reflect the fact that the installation now has dissimilar cables.

102  5 – Steady State Thermal Analysis


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Define a new execution starting from scratch


You can also create a new execution starting from scratch the same way you create a new study except that
the new execution created will be saved within the same study of the existing execution selected. For the
example demonstration leave the check box “Start from scratch” unchecked.

Modify the solution option from the CYMCAP menu


The solution Option can be specified from the main CYMCAP Menu. Enter the menu item Edit and access the
Solution Option entry.

5 – Steady State Thermal Analysis  103


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

The new installation will comprise one trefoil formation, one flat formation and one 3-core cable. Since the
majority of the conductor temperatures will be 90°C and most of the circuits will feature a Load factor of 0.75
both can be specified along with the generic circuit description, when defining the installation setup.

104  5 – Steady State Thermal Analysis


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Enter a group of cables using absolute coordinates


The 44 kV submarine cables are arranged in flat formation with spacing of 1 ft buried at a depth of 5 ft.
If all the cables of the circuit are selected, the absolute coordinates of the formation are entered as a group by
specifying the position of the left most cable along with the cable spacing.
If the cables in the circuit were selected individually, the absolute coordinates of each of them should have
been entered. The conductor temperature and the Load factor will be defined to be 90 and 0.75 respectively.
Click on OK and the circuit appears drawn to the right.

5 – Steady State Thermal Analysis  105


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Enter a trefoil formation using relative coordinates


The trefoil formation is located at 1.5 ft to the right and 1.0 ft towards the surface from the rightmost cable.
In order to avoid entering absolute coordinates with respect to the leftmost cable of the flat formation we
denote the cable to the right as the beacon cable. Select the cable whose coordinates are to be designated
as the reference coordinates and click on the Beacon Cable button on the bottom left corner of the
installation display window. The beacon cable is then enclosed within a colored square.
The trefoil formation coordinates are then entered with respect to the beacon cable. As follows:

The last cable (3-core) is then entered, using the same cable as beacon cable.

106  5 – Steady State Thermal Analysis


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Specify a “fixed ampacity circuit”


The three-core cable will have a Load factor of 1.00 and will be a fixed ampacity circuit. Note that by
specifying the circuit to be a fixed ampacity circuit, the Temperature field reverts to Circuit Ampacity. It is there
that the fixed ampacity values need to be entered.

5 – Steady State Thermal Analysis  107


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Specify a heat source included in the installation


The next task is to define the heat source and its characteristics. Click on the dedicated button of the
Execution bar and fill-in the data as illustrated below: Click OK to accept all entries.

The installation data screen is now split in 2 parts, the upper part reserved for the cable installation data and
the lower part reserved for the heat source data.

108  5 – Steady State Thermal Analysis


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

To add more heat sources just click on the list on the lower part of the Installation Data window which is
reserved for heat sources. Click on “Add” button to add the desired number of heat source. Select from the list
a new heat source added and click “Edit” button to complete the heat source data. Repeat the same
procedure to complete information for all of them.

Specific installation data


The execution data need now to be completed by entering the specific installation data. The 15kV cables are
assumed to be single-point bonded and the 44kV cables two-point bonded, non-transposed with even spacing
along the cable run. The 69 kV cable is assumed to be two-point bonded. It is emphasized again that
specific installation data need to be entered for all the cable types. The screen below indicates
specific installation data for the 46 kV cables arranged in flat formation.

5 – Steady State Thermal Analysis  109


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Results reporting
CYMCAP has four facilities to report the computed results; three of them are graphical and one is tabular
(with many discriminating options). The graphical results are shown using: I
 Labels appearing directly on the installation screen (described in section Steady-state results labels)
 Position labels following the mouse selection (section Viewing the graphical ampacity reports by mouse
selection)
 Combined with option (2) double clicking on the selected cable in the installation will give detailed
information on the temperature and losses of a cable per layer.

Steady-state results labels


Steady-State Results Labels have been introduced in CYMCAP to display the steady-state ampacity and
temperature results for all cables directly on the installation. This capability allows the user to create
enhanced reports using the graphic representation of the installation.
You can position the labels anywhere around the representation of the installation and select the type of
connection line the between the individual cables and their associated labels. A label grid can be used also to
help you rapidly position all labels orthogonally.
An example of an installation with labels after the solution has been obtained is illustrated below.

110  5 – Steady State Thermal Analysis


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

View/hide labels
The main menu item View includes three options for viewing or hiding the labels. A dot is displayed on the left
of the menu command indicating the active option.

No labels Hides all labels on the display. Short cut: CTRL+N


All labels Displays all labels. Short cut: CTRL+L
Only label(s) with cable(s) selected Shows only the labels for selected cable(s) Short cut: CTRL+O

5 – Steady State Thermal Analysis  111


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Label grid editor


The Label Grid Editor can be opened or closed from the main menu item View > Label Grid. It can also be
also activated or deactivated with the short cut CTRL+G.

To use the facility follow this steps: click on a label to select it and drag it to a free cell of your choice (the
label being dragged will be highlighted in yellow). Once you have finished positioning your labels, you can
hide the label grid.
If many labels are overlapping, then click the cable for which you want to move the label. Automatically, the
status of that label will change and appear as selected with its current background color. All other labels will
be colored in gray.

112  5 – Steady State Thermal Analysis


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Select/move/align labels
To move one label: simply drag-and-drop it to the desired location.
To move group of labels: Hold down the CTRL key while you click on all the labels you want to select. Drag-
and-drop one of the labels to the desired location still holding down the CTRL key.
To align group of labels: Select the group of labels to be aligned and right click on the last label selected.
This will open a popup menu from which you will select how you want them aligned: see figure below. The
last label selected is used as the reference point for the alignment.

5 – Steady State Thermal Analysis  113


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Here is the final result obtained after aligning labels.

Change the connection line between the cable and its associated label
Click on any label displayed in the installation. Roll the mouse wheel forward or backward until you find the
desired connection line to be used between the cable and the label associated to it. Once this is done, click
anywhere on the display.
An alternative way to change the connection line is explained in the following section.

114  5 – Steady State Thermal Analysis


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Change the properties of a label


Select any label displayed on the installation and double-click to display the Label Editor dialog box to edit
the label properties.

The Label Editor dialog box allows you to change the color of a selected label and of its text. You can also
change the appearance of the port connector between the cable and the associated label by selecting the
picture representing the final look desired. You can apply your selections to all labels by activating the Apply
to all labels check box. Once is done, click OK to accept changes.
The figures below show an example of changes applied to one label.

5 – Steady State Thermal Analysis  115


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Customize information to display in the label


Select any label displayed on the installation and double-click to display the Label Editor dialog box to edit
the label properties.

The Label Editor dialog box allows you to customize the information to be showed for all labels in the
installation after calculation has been done. Check items that you want to be displayed and put them in the

116  5 – Steady State Thermal Analysis


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

order you want by clicking Up arrow/Down arrow to place them accordingly. Look at the right under SAMPLE
empty box to see how information will be displayed in the label. You can change also the text size. Once is
done, click OK to accept changes.
The figures below show an example of new information desired for all labels.

Click OK to accept changes.

5 – Steady State Thermal Analysis  117


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

To hide all information displayed on labels just select any label displayed on the installation and double-click
to display the Label Editor dialog box again.

Check the “Hide all” option and click OK to accept changes.

118  5 – Steady State Thermal Analysis


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Reset all labels to their default positions


After solving an execution, place the cursor anywhere in the graphic representation of the installation and
right click to display the popup menu. Open the submenu named Labels and select Reset to default
positions. You will be prompted to confirm this action.
You can reset the labels to their default positions at any time.

Here is the result obtained after selecting the option.

5 – Steady State Thermal Analysis  119


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Keep all labels positions permanently


You simply need to Save the execution to keep the current positions of labels permanently. The next time that
this execution will be opened and solved again, all labels will be displayed at the same location as before.

Viewing the graphical ampacity reports by mouse


selection
The reports for cables in a trefoil formation follow the same philosophy as for any other cable. The only
difference is that CYMCAP recognizes the individual identity of every phase in the trefoil arrangement both
when pointing with the mouse on the trefoil arrangement as well as for the detailed reports on a cable per
cable basis.

120  5 – Steady State Thermal Analysis


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

If another phase of the trefoil formation is of interest, the Phase Id dropdown list above the symbol portraying
the trefoil gives access to it. Select the appropriate phase and the new report will be generated.
Whenever viewing graphical ampacity reports, the cable that is enclosed in a red square was determined to
be the hottest cable in the entire installation.

5 – Steady State Thermal Analysis  121


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Steady-State report
The user can access the steady-state report after performing a simulation by clicking on the Steady-State
Report button at the bottom of the installation screen. When doing so, an Excel report is generated.

Excel report
CYMCAP (version 4.3 and higher) generates an extended graphical/tabular report in Excel format. It is
intended as a final report that can be produced when the user is satisfied with the results and he/she wishes
to write a report. To gain access to it click on the Excel Report button (as shown in the figure).

The Excel report will at the very least produce the summary report. It includes all the general input data, a
figure with the installation and a table with the ampacity per cable. Depending on the number of cables and
the installation type, the report may be in one or two pages. The following figures show and example.
The Summary report may include your company’s logo. For this, it will be necessary to capture the logo and
enter it into the file Logo.jpg. The file should be set on the directory where CYMCAP is installed. The logo will
be placed in the upper right-hand side corner (see figure below).
The Summary tab of the Excel sheet is always produced. When the user is working with the Imperial system
of units this is the sole tab that will be produced. When the user wants the extended report, it is necessary to
work in the Metric system of units.

You can now operate on the results using the tools available in Excel; you can save or print the report as you
wish. There are no facilities to automatically close Excel, thus the user will have to close it manually.

122  5 – Steady State Thermal Analysis


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

5 – Steady State Thermal Analysis  123


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

When the user is working with the Metric system of units, the Excel report may contain up to 5 working
sheets. Depending on the selected solution options and the modules that the user is subscribed to, the
following reports could be generated:
 Summary – As described above.
 Cables – Containing all cables input data for each cable type used from the installation, specific
installation data (bonding type, loss factor constant, duct construction, etc…), temperature calculations
and cable screen captures showing all dimensions.
 Electrical – Containing important electrical parameters, such as: resistances, inductances, capacitances,
sequence impedances, losses, voltage drop, etc.
 Steady State – Displaying all intermediate calculation for the steady state ratings in accordance to the
IEC 60287 Standards.
 Emergency – Duplicating the hand calculation of the emergency cable rating methods given in the IEC
60853 Standards.
 Short Circuit – Displaying all the parameters used in the IEC Standard 60949 for short circuit rating (only
if the user has subscribed to the SCR module).
The following figure shows how the information is classified in the Excel reports. As before the user is
free to operate, save and print one or all the sheets of the enhanced report.

The Electrical Tab


The electrical tab requires further explanation and clarification. The displayed parameters have been
computed with simplified equations and the user should use them in an informed manner and only when
he/she is in full agreement with the calculation method. The equations and meaning of each parameter for the
quantities not available in the IEC Standards 60287 are described next.
Dielectric Stress at conductor surface

[ ⁄ ]
( )

Where:
U0 = Phase to Neutral Voltage [kV]
Di = Internal diameter of insulation (excluding shield) [mm]
De = External diameter of insulation (excluding screen) [mm]

124  5 – Steady State Thermal Analysis


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Inductance of Conductor

( ) [ ⁄ ]

Where:
S = Axial spacing between the conductors [mm]
Refer to IEC 60287-1-1 (Clauses 2.3)
Dc = Conductor diameter [mm]
K = 0.0642 (for 7 wires stranded conductor)
= 0.0554 (for 19 wires stranded conductor)
= 0.0528 (for 37 wires stranded conductor)
= 0.0514 (for 61 wires and above stranded conductor)
= 0.05 (for solid conductor)

Reactance of Conductor

[ ⁄ ]

Where:
L = Inductance (mH/km)
f = Frequency [Hz]

Positive Sequence Impedance

[ ⁄ ]

Negative Sequence Impedance

[ ⁄ ]

Zero Sequence Impedance

[ ⁄ ]
Where:
R0 = Zero sequence resistance of the conductors per phase
= AC Resistance of one conductor @ 20 °C without
the increase for proximity effect
+ 3 resistance of the metallic covering for 3 core cables
or + the resistance of the metallic covering for single core
cables
or + the resistance of one metallic sheath in parallel with
three times the resistance of the armour for SL cables
X0 = Zero Sequence Reactance = Reactance of sheath
(see below)

5 – Steady State Thermal Analysis  125


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Inductance of Sheath (and Concentric Wires)

( ) [ ⁄ ]

Where:
S = Axial spacing between the conductors [mm]
Refer to IEC 60287-1-1 (Clauses 2.3)
d = the mean diameter of the sheath [mm]

Reactance of Sheath

[ ⁄ ]

Insulation Resistance @ 15.6°C

( ) [ ] [ ]

Where:
K = Specific insulation resistance constant at 15.6 ⁰C [MΩ.km] or [MΩ.1000 ft]
Di = Internal diameter of insulation (excluding shield)
De = External diameter of insulation (excluding screen)

Capacitance

[ ⁄ ]
( )

Where:
Di = Internal diameter of insulation (excluding shield) [mm]
De = External diameter of insulation (excluding screen) [mm]
 = Relative Permittivity of insulation
Refer to IEC 60287-1-1 (Clause 2.2)

Charging Current

[ ⁄ ]

Where:
C = Capacitance in [mF/km]
f = frequency [hz]
U0 = Phase to neutral voltage [kV]

Charging Capacity of three phase system at U0

Charging Capacity = 3 U0 IC [KVar/Km]


Where:
U0 = Phase to neutral voltage (kV)

126  5 – Steady State Thermal Analysis


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Surge Impedance

√ [ ⁄ ]

Where:
L = Inductance [mH/km]
C = Capacitance [mF/km]

Induced Voltage on Metallic Screen


Standing voltage for single point bonded cables. Zero for bonded ends and cross bonded cables.

Induced Current on Metallic Screen

[ ]

Where:
I = Current
Xm = Mutual reactance
RS = Sheath resistance at maximum permissible
temperature

Voltage Drop for Three Phase Systems

√ [ ( ) ( )] [ ]
Where:
 = Phase angle between voltage and current

Reduction Factor

5 – Steady State Thermal Analysis  127


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Opening more than one executions simultaneously


CYMCAP offers the possibility to work simultaneously on more than one execution. The executions
may belong to the same or to different studies. In order to be able to open more than one execution, the
CYMCAP Navigator needs to remain accessible. Once the navigator appears, uncheck the Hide on Edit
checkbox. By default, the option is active, instructing CYMCAP to close the Navigator when an execution is
edited. This is because the program assumes by default that the user will work on one execution at the time.
If the option is unchecked, then the Navigator stays on to edit another execution when the previous execution
has already been edited.

Note that the execution title appears at the top of the screen. There is also a dropdown list List of all open
studies that contains the names of all the opened studies. The study title also appears clearly above the
CYMCAP ribbon. If a second execution is opened, from the same study, the active windows will show
the second execution unless CYMCAP is instructed to either tile or cascade the Windows (access the
menu entry Windows to set the desired Option). Cascaded, the two executions look as follows.

128  5 – Steady State Thermal Analysis


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

The highlighted window pertains to the last loaded execution. Note that the same could have been
accomplished by clicking on the study title alone. In that case, all the executions within the study will be
opened automatically.
CYMCAP groups the edited executions by study in order to facilitate editing. If the executions for one study
are already opened and another study is opened, the executions for the previous study are iconized and the
executions of the new study appear cascaded in the foreground. The newly opened study is added to the
study dropdown list. By accessing the proper study on the dropdown list one can bring to the foreground all its
executions and iconize the rest without having to close individually all the executions in the foreground.

5 – Steady State Thermal Analysis  129


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

If any of the executions in the foreground are closed, the remaining ones from the study are available. If all
the executions within the study are closed, then all the iconized executions will appear in the foreground.
The same principles apply when editing executions from different studies and there is only one execution per
study.

130  5 – Steady State Thermal Analysis


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Working with more than one executions simultaneously


Once more than one execution is opened any one can be designated as active. The following screen portrays
two executions tiled vertically.

By performing any type of editing or operation, the execution occupies completely the foreground as if it as
the only one opened. The executions remain independent each retaining its own ribbon with full access to the
entire editing facilities.

Submitting more than one executions simultaneously


Once 2 (or more) executions are opened, they can be submitted individually by clicking on the Solve all

executions button located next to the CYMCAP ribbon. All the reports for both executions will be
generated.

5 – Steady State Thermal Analysis  131


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

6 – Transient Analysis

General
Transient thermal analysis is performed to assess the maximum permissible currents that a cable can sustain
over a specific period of time without violating cable material thermal specifications. These violations could
either lead to imminent cable failure or substantially shorten the cable's life by causing premature failure. The
transient analysis options supported by CYMCAP addresses these concerns and are subsequently analyzed.

Preliminary considerations
Transient analyses can only be performed after a steady state thermal analysis for the installation has
already been successfully performed. This is because a part of the steady state simulation results are used as
initial conditions for the transient calculations.
Every cable in the installation must be assigned a load curve for transient analysis studies. This curve
determines the variation of the current over a given period of time. The actual ampacity assigned to the cable
under transient conditions, is determined with the aid of the SCALING FACTOR. This number is a factor by
which the steady state cable current, as resulted from steady state analysis, will be multiplied. The load curve
itself has also a factor of its own for every portion in the curve (see Chapter 4). Therefore the current applied
to the cable, for a given time interval, will be the product of the cable current as resulted from steady state
analysis multiplied by the effective load curve scaling factor.

Note: The program does not support transient calculations in the presence of moisture migration.
This means that transient studies can only be executed for the cases where moisture
migration was not modeled in steady state. Transient is not supported either for cables
installed in air and/or on riser poles.

6 – Transient Analysis  133


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Transient analysis options

Solve for Ampacity given Time and Temperature


In this analysis option, the user enters the temperature that a specific cable component (conductor, sheath,
etc.) is to reach in a desired time (hours) and the program computes the maximum possible current for the
cables. The same cable component is effective for all cables in the installation. The user should not select a
temperature below the ambient temperature used for the steady state analysis. The following screen
illustrates the parameters involved.

Since more than one circuit may be present in the installation, it may be desirable to determine the ampacity
of some with the remaining at a constant current value. This is expressed by the notion of the “participating
circuit”. The program will calculate ampacities for all “participating” circuits if the option “simultaneously” is
selected. Instead, if the option “one at a time” is selected, the program will calculate ampacities for one circuit
at a time assuming that the remaining are held at their steady state loading. Non-participating circuits are
always held at their steady state loading.
The program reports the required cable currents in terms of SCALING FACTORS based on the results
obtained form the steady state analysis.

134  6 – Transient Analysis


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Solve for Temperature given Time and Ampacity


In this analysis option, the program will solve for the temperature of the desired cable component given time
and ampacity. Again, ampacities are entered in terms of scaling factors. The following screen illustrates the
parameters involved.

It is not possible to use time intervals of less than 10 minutes since the assumptions made in the numerical
expressions to compute the ampacity are not valid for short time periods.

6 – Transient Analysis  135


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Solve for Time given Ampacity and Temperature


In this analysis option the user specifies the maximum temperature of the component of interest and the
current. The program will calculate the time required to reach these conditions for the first time. When step-
loading functions are applied, the program will calculate the time at which the maximum permissible
temperature is reached. When more complex loading patterns are considered, the program will calculate only
the FIRST occurrence (in the specified range) of the user-specified value of temperature and scale factor. The
following illustrates the parameters involved.

Both the accuracy and the solution speed depend upon the selected Range of search time and Resolution.
There are cases for which the program may not be able to find a solution. In this case, verify that the time
range dictated for the search is consistent with the temperatures and ampacities specified.

136  6 – Transient Analysis


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Temperature as a function of Ampacity


This option is similar to the second option described earlier with the difference that instead of considering one
ampacity (scale factor) the program considers many at the time. The user supplies, as before, the cable
component of interest (conductor sheath etc.), the required time of analysis in hours and a set of scaling
factors. The set of scaling factors is defined by specifying the INITIAL and FINAL value for the scaling factor
range and the RESOLUTION of the scale factor interval. The following illustrates the parameters involved.

For each scale factor there will be a different ampacity and therefore a different temperature the component of
interest will reach in the specified time. The notion of “participating’ circuits” becomes relevant here as well.
By default, all circuits are considered as “participating” unless a scaling factor is specified.

6 – Transient Analysis  137


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Ampacity as a function of Time


This option is similar to the third option described earlier with the difference that instead of considering one
ampacity (scale factor) the program can consider many. The user supplies, as before, the cable component of
interest (conductor, sheath, etc.) and the maximum permissible temperature that the component can reach.
The program will then calculate how long the cables can carry a given set of currents.
This option requires the user to supply a time interval within which the calculations are made. It is possible
that for a given set of data no solution will be found in the specified time interval.

138  6 – Transient Analysis


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Temperature as a function of Time


This option allows the user to assess what temperatures a given cable component can reach when exposed
to a given ampacity for a set of specific time intervals. The user supplies the cable component of interest as
well as the cables ampacities (the scale factor) or enters directly the emergency current to reach (Emergency
Current A). The required set of exposures (in hours) is defined by supplying an INITIAL and FINAL time as
well as a RESOLUTION.

How to proceed for a transient analysis


The following steps are normally followed in the indicated sequence in order to carry out any of the transient
analysis options.
1. Make sure that the load curves to be used are in the load curve library. If not, enter them first and then
proceed.
2. Choose the appropriate transient analysis option and provide all the necessary data.
3. Assign loads to cables. This activity is crucial because it is here that the specific load curves will be
assigned to various cables.
4. Save the changes for the new execution.
5. Submit the desired execution to obtain the steady state results and transient analysis.
6. View tabular and graphical results.

6 – Transient Analysis  139


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Informing CYMCAP that a transient analysis is to be


performed
Suppose that for an existing execution a transient analysis is to be performed. Edit the execution at hand.
Then from the CYMCAP menu select the Edit > Solution Option > Transient Analysis menu option. The
check mark that appears next to it is the flag that indicated to CYMCAP that a transient simulation is to follow
the steady state analysis.

140  6 – Transient Analysis


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Example and Illustrations

Case description and illustrations


During the following example, the execution featuring 6 cables in a duct bank is used to illustrate the process
of performing a transient analysis with CYMCAP. Temperatures of all cables as function of time will be
generated. Every circuit shall be assigned a different Load and the conductor temperatures as a function of
time will be assessed. The Load curve for circuit 2 shall be considered to be the same as the Load curve for
circuit 1. An overload of 20% and 40% will be assumed for the circuits #1 and #2 respectively. The
temperatures will be monitored for 48 hours.
During the course of this example the following aspects of CYMCAP are illustrated:
 Specify the transient analysis option.
 Specify the data for the transient analysis option.
 Assign loads to cables.
 Submit the simulation.
 Generate the reports and view tabular and graphical results for transient analysis.
 How to selectively display results for various cables in the installation
 Change the color of the curves for the transient reports.
 Observe the transients results directly on the graph instead of generating tabular reports.

Specify the transient analysis option


Edit the execution, and as described in the previous paragraph, enable the transient analysis option. Then
click on the ribbon icon that gives access to the transient data to select the desired analysis option. Here
“Temperature as a function of Time”.

6 – Transient Analysis  141


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Specify the data for the transient analysis option


Once the desired transient option has been selected, we need to provide the accompanying data.

Click on OK to accept the data and let us now assign loads to cables.

Assign loads to cables


Click on the button labeled “Go to assign loads (transient)” located at the bottom left of the installation window
(the same function can be performed by right clicking anywhere on the window that contains the pictorial
representation of the cable installation.

142  6 – Transient Analysis


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

The Load Curve library window is then displayed and any load curve can be assigned to the circuit in
question. For this particular example the “weekly” loading curve will be used. Highlight the desired Load curve
and click the Apply button. The same operation is repeated for the second circuit.

6 – Transient Analysis  143


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Submit the simulation


Once the transient data is entered, the execution is submitted by clicking on the appropriate NAME on the
ribbon. Although, this is the same button as used for steady state analysis, the transient analysis follows for
this case. The successful completion of both steady state and transient analysis is indicated.

Once both steady state and transient analyses are successful, reports for both are available as the enabled
buttons at the bottom of the screen indicate. Both reports can be accessed through these buttons.

144  6 – Transient Analysis


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Generate the reports


Click on the Transient report button. By default, the results for the first circuit will appear.

The cables for which graphical results are displayed, are also highlighted in the actual installation and in the
Installation Data dialog box to the left. Results for any cable in the installation can be selected by either (a)
highlighting the cable on the cable installation screen (left) portraying the cables coordinates (b) pointing to
the cable of interest in the installation and clicking on it. In either case, the cables are highlighted for clarity.
The horizontal dashed line shown on the graph represents the maximum permissible temperature specified in
the data. Click on the Select All button at the bottom of the Installation Data dialog box to view the graphical
results for all the cables. Similarly, any phase can also be viewed alone by highlighting it.
The load curve associated with any circuit can be superimposed on the graph picturing the temperature
variations with time by clicking on the dedicated icon of the transient report window as illustrated below.

6 – Transient Analysis  145


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Furthermore, a tabular report is available that portrays the time intervals during which the stipulated maximum
temperature has been exceeded. Again, this can be accomplished by clicking on the dedicated icon in the
ribbon of the transient report window. The result for this particular case, (no such intervals exist) is illustrated
below:

146  6 – Transient Analysis


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Change the color of the curves for the transient reports


It is also seen that the graphical results window indicates what cable and what phase is drawn. The color can
be changed by double clicking on the color indicator of the curves.

6 – Transient Analysis  147


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Observe the transients results


The results for the transient simulation can be observed with precision directly on the graph. Position the
cursor anywhere on one of the curves generated and the “temperature, time” coordinates of the current point
will appear at the bottom right of the screen.

Finally, tabular reports are also available for the transient analysis. Both tabular and graphical reports can be
printed/plotted and copied to the Windows clipboard as the appropriate icons within the report-Windows
indicate. Tabular reports can be generated by clicking on the most-left icon of the transient report window
ribbon.

148  6 – Transient Analysis


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

7 – Approximate Temperature
Field

Introduction
After a successful steady state simulation, CYMCAP can plot an approximate map of the isotherms for
underground installations. The easiest way to produce the plot is by clicking on Ctrl–t. Alternatively, the plot
can be obtained using the ViewApproximate Temperature Field menu option.

7 – Approximate Temperature Field  149


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Scopes and limitations


There are important assumptions made in the calculation of the temperature distribution. The user needs to
be aware that CYMCAP only displays an approximate plot of the isothermals. As a consequence of the
assumptions, the temperature values are only accurate at a far distance from the cables and when they are
directly buried in soil with uniform and constant thermal resistivity.
The assumptions are the following:
 All media is assumed isotropic, homogeneous and linear. Therefore, air inside ducts and pipes is not
considered. The concrete of backfills and duct banks is also neglected.
 Heat sources are represented as filaments.
 The image method is used to warrant an isothermal (at ambient temperature) at the soil-air boundary.

Under those conditions we can compute the temperature with the fundamental solution of Fourier Law. This is
obtained next. Let us start with the general expression of Fourier Law:

Where:
 = Temperature [K]
 = Soil thermal resistivity [K-m/W]
W = Heat loss [W/m]

In cylindrical coordinates and assuming that there is not longitudinal heat flow (consistent with CYMCAP
calculations) we have:

( )

The fundamental solution is given by:

( ) ( )

Adding the effect of all conductors (and their images) we get (in Cartesian coordinates):

√( ) ( )
( ) ∑ { ( )}
√( ) ( )

150  7 – Approximate Temperature Field


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

When the non-isothermal earth surface modeling option is selected, the previous equation is slightly modified
to account for the presence of the fictitious layer defined in section Methodology and computational
standards, yielding:

√( ) ( )
( ) ∑ { ( )}
√( ) ( )

It is important to note that under non-isothermal earth surface conditions, the earth/air interface displayed in
green in the GUI rather represents the bottom surface of the fictitious layer. Therefore, its temperature is not
uniform and is slightly higher than the ambient air temperature used as reference in the model.

Customizing the isotherms


The number, level, color and value labels of the isotherms can be customized. After a successful steady state
simulation, the user can access the customization facility clicking on:

The defaults are shown in the next figure:

7 – Approximate Temperature Field  151


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

The color of an individual isotherm is changed by double clicking on the color line and selecting a new one
from the palette (see figure below).

A single value or a range can be added. Adding a range between 40 and 50 with a step of 2 is illustrated
below.

The resolution the number of numerical labels and the zoom can be adjusted from the lower part of the
Contour level data screen.

152  7 – Approximate Temperature Field


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

The defaults produce acceptable results in most cases for isotherms that are not very close to the cables,
which are the more accurate ones. Isotherms that are close to the cable may appear broken. This can be
easily fixed by reducing the resolution. When the resolution is too small the calculation time could be very
large. After 10 seconds the following message is issued.

Automatic design of backfills/duct banks


One of the applications of the approximate temperature field plot is the ability to determine the size of a
backfill or duct bank. For example, consider that moisture migration will be prevented by substituting the
native soil with temperature above 60C by a backfill of thermally stable material. Start by performing a
directly buried steady state ampacity simulation. Then press Ctrl-t to produce the temperature field plot.
Frequently it is necessary to zoom out to be able to see the bottom part of the installation.

Then by clicking and dragging the cursor from one corner to another the selected rectangular area will
automatically become a backfill; see the figure.

7 – Approximate Temperature Field  153


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

When answering Yes, the Cables in Backfill data screen will pop up allowing adjusting the size and entering
the thermal resistivity of the backfill material.

The new installation and field distribution look as follows:

154  7 – Approximate Temperature Field


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Remember that in the temperature field plot the presence of backfills and ducts is neglected.
If you do not like your results and need a different size you can simply click and pull to create a different size
backfill (see figure below).

7 – Approximate Temperature Field  155


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

This functionality works for:


 Directly buried
 Backfills
 Buried ducts
 Nonstandard duct banks

156  7 – Approximate Temperature Field


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

8 – The Sensitivity Analysis


Option of CYMCAP
This activity permits a particular kind of sensitivity analysis and is implemented to automate the generation
and solution of a particular set of executions pertaining to the so-called “Peak Ratings Analysis”.
The problem manifests itself, normally, for various circuits (feeders) within a duct bank and can be defined as
follows:
 Assume that the installation has a certain number of circuits.
 Assume that the “Temperature” analysis Option is selected for the steady state analysis. That means that
for all involved circuits, currents are impressed and resulting temperatures as sought. This is considered
to be the base case for the analysis.
 Assume now that one is interested in finding the maximum current that can be impressed in any of
the circuits so that its temperature does not exceed a target temperature while the rest of the
circuits remain unaltered, i.e., they carry the same currents as in the base case.
 Assume that the same question is of interest for all the circuits within the installation, considered one at a
time.
If this problem is to be resolved using the base facilities of the program the user will be forced to:
 Create a new execution every time a new circuit is to be examined.
 For every one of these executions, the circuit in question needs to be selected.
 The circuit current needs to be changed to limiting temperature instead.
 The solution Option needs to be changed to “Unequally Loaded”
 The circuit in question needs to be labeled as the “Reference circuit”
 The execution needs to be renamed and saved
 The process needs to be repeated for all involved circuits.
 All the executions need to be submitted for solution.
All these activities are permissible activities and perfectly well defined within the capabilities of the program.
The fact, however, remains that this is a tedious process and prone to error. That is why the Sensitivity
Analysis option at hand is implemented to fully automate the process. In other words, the program will
automatically generate the needed executions with the proper configuration, solve them simultaneously
without any unnecessary user intervention and display the reports in a manner conducive to ready inspection.
Furthermore, more than one limiting temperature can be requested on a per circuit basis.

To enable the Sensitivity Analysis button you need to set the steady state solution option to
Temperature, as shown below

8 – The Sensitivity Analysis Option of CYMCAP  157


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

The procedure is best illustrated by the following example. Assume that the installation portrayed below is to
be analyzed for “peak-ratings” analysis. Limiting temperatures of 90 degrees (normal) and emergency
temperatures of 100 and 110 degrees (emergency) are sought for all involved circuits.

Note: There are two fundamental assumptions at the beginning of the simulation:
 Each circuit is assigned a current.
 None of the circuit exceeds the normal temperature.

Click on the Sensitivity Analysis icon in the Execution bar to activate the sensitivity analysis option.

158  8 – The Sensitivity Analysis Option of CYMCAP


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

For this particular case, two emergency temperatures were requested (100 and 110 degrees) because the step
was chosen to be 10.0 degrees. Since there are four circuits in the installation, a total of twelve executions shall
be created (one execution for the normal temperature of 90 degrees and two for the emergency temperatures of
100 and 110 degrees for every circuit). Once the execution is saved, the ensuing prompt requests confirmation
of the activity.

Click Yes to Proceed, and a total of 12 executions are created as can be seen in the Study Navigator.

8 – The Sensitivity Analysis Option of CYMCAP  159


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

These executions are already tagged and appear below the “parent” execution, featuring only currents in the
circuits.
These executions need to be edited and solved. Click the Edit tagged button in the Navigator to display
each in its dedicated window. All the windows will be arranged in cascade.

The Solve All Execution button in the CYMCAP toolbar can be used to solve them all simultaneously and
results can be viewed at will after that.

160  8 – The Sensitivity Analysis Option of CYMCAP


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

9– Useful Toolbox for the


Designer

Show the installation drag & drop toolbox


An execution should be opened first to be able to access the “Installation Drag & Drop toolbox” menu item
from the CYMCAP menu. Select the top menu item “View” to check or uncheck the item “Installation Drag &
Drop toolbox”. By default, the item is already checked. Click on the Installation data icon or Multiple
installation data icon from the Execution bar to open the toolbox.

9– Useful Toolbox for the Designer  161


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Rapidly add a cable(s) to an installation


To rapidly add a new cable to your installation, drag & drop a cable symbol of your choice from the
installation toolbox into the installation to the desired location. It can be dragged into a free conduit for a
standard ductbank installation or anywhere for a non-standard ductbank installation. You can also see the
coordinates of the cable to be positioned at the bottom right corner of the installation.
In the example below, we will add a new three-phase circuit to the existing ductbank. Click on the top item of
the installation toolbox and then drag it into any free conduit of the ductbank. Red squares will appear
inside the duct bank as soon as your cursor is placed over the installation. These squares identify the free
ducts. Drop the three-phase circuit onto any free duct.

The same procedure applies to the remaining cable symbols in the list and for the other symbols grouped
under the categories “Heat source”, “Ductbank’, “Casing” and “Load Curve”.
One or more symbols may be disabled (greyed out) dependiing on the type of installation. For example, a
standard ductbank installation does not allow pipe type cables and ducts in trefoil configuration. As you can
see from the installation drag & drop toolbox above, those symbols are greyed out and not accessible to the
user.
The symbol showing a question mark with the word “More…” is different. If you drag and drop it to the
installation, it will only open the “Installation setup” dialog box. You will be able to add any number of new
cables or add cable(s) not covered by the installation drag & drop toolbox. It is equivalent to clicking the “Add”
button under the list of cables.
Once a cable has been dropped, the cable library selection box opens up automatically for you to make the
cable selection.

162  9– Useful Toolbox for the Designer


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Click on “OK” to accept the selected cable and complete the process. Click on “Cancel” to undo the action of
adding of a new cable and return to the initial state.

9– Useful Toolbox for the Designer  163


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Switch to another category of symbols


The toolbox contains different categories of symbols that can be used for
dragging & dropping on the installation. At the bottom of the toolbox, you can
see all the categories listed one over the other. Some of them can be disabled
depending on the type of installation you are working on. Click on the button
identifying the desired category to make a switch. As you can see, the category
currently selected is “underlined”.

Description of symbols per category

Cables
Select this symbol to add one three-phase circuit to the installation.

Select this symbol to add one single-core cable to the installation.

Select this symbol to add one trefoil to the installation.

Select this symbol to add one three-core cable to the installation.

Select this symbol to add one pipe-type cable to the installation.

164  9– Useful Toolbox for the Designer


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Select this symbol to add one ducts-in-trefoil configuration to the installation.

Select this symbol to add one neutral cable to the installation.

Select this symbol to add any number of cables described above or add a different cable(s)
configuration not present in the toolbox. Double-click to open the Setup dialog box.

Heat Sources
Select this symbol to add one new heat source to the installation.

Select this symbol to add one new cold source to the installation.

Ductbanks (working for MDB only)


Select this symbol to add one standard ductbank to the MDB installation.

Select this symbol to add one non-standard ductbank to the MDB installation.

Select this symbol to add one filled casing to the MDB installation.

Select this symbol to add one backfill to the MDB installation.

Select this symbol to add one trough to the MDB installation.

Select this symbol to add one duct to the MDB installation.

9– Useful Toolbox for the Designer  165


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Select this symbol to add one duct in trefoils (head up) to the MDB installation.

Select this symbol to add one duct in trefoils (head down) to the MDB installation.

Jobs template
Select this symbol to add one job template from the group “non-standard ductbank” to the
MDB installation. Double-click to open the Job template dialog box.

Select this symbol to add one job template from the group “trough” to the MDB installation.
Double-click to open the Job template dialog box.

Select this symbol to add one job template from the group “filled casing” to the MDB
installation. Double-click to open the Job template dialog box.

Select this symbol to add one job template from the group “others” to the MDB installation.
Double-click to open the Job template dialog box.

Casings (working for Multiple casings only)


Select this symbol to add one non-standard casing to the multiple casing installation.

Select this symbol to add one duct into a casing to the multiple casing installation.

Load curves (working with Transient Analysis activated only)


Select this symbol to assign a load curve to one or many cables selected from the
installation.

166  9– Useful Toolbox for the Designer


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Add a new backfill to the MDB installation using the


toolbox
First, open an existing MDB installation and click on the Multiple installation data icon from the
Execution bar to open the drag & drop toolbox. The “Ductbank” category is selected automatically for you.

Select the backfill drawing to drag it to any free region of the installation. Drop it to the region where you want
the backfill to be added. The dialog box to add new backfills will be displayed and automatically determine the
area corresponding to the region where you have dropped the backfill. If this is what you want, then click on
OK to accept. Otherwise, select another backfill region or change the coordinates of the backfill to make it fit
to your needs. Click on “Cancel” to ignore the last action.

Assign a load curve to cable(s) in the installation using


the toolbox
First, open an existing installation with Transient option activated and click on the Installation data icon
from the Execution bar to open the list of cables.

Select one circuit or all cables from the list and click on the “Load curve” category at the bottom of the toolbox
to make the switch.

Click on the picture item called “Assign load curve” and drag it over the list of cables or anywhere over the
installation. Drop it on the desired cable.

9– Useful Toolbox for the Designer  167


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

This action will open up the list of load curves, for the user to make the selection. Choose any load curve to
be applied to the cable(s) selected and click on the “Apply” button to accept.

Once this is done, the new load curve ID is displayed for each of the cables selected.

168  9– Useful Toolbox for the Designer


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

9– Useful Toolbox for the Designer  169


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

10 – The CYMCAP Menu

Overview of the CYMCAP Menu


When outlining the program operational aspects in previous chapters, the application was operated from the
Execution bar. Many of these functions can also be accessed from the CYMCAP menu located at the top of
the screen encompassing the opened execution(s). The descriptions of The File menu and of The Window
menu below assume that no execution is open.

The CYMCAP menu features the items File, Window, Help

The File menu


Click on the File menu and the options to either open a New study, Open Navigator, Customize Graph
Template or Exit appear as alternatives.

The first two menu options can also be accessed through the buttons located below the main menu items.

Opens a new study

Displays the CYMCAP Navigator (same as pressing the F3 key)

The third option allows the user to replace default CYME graph template with a customized one to be used
with Transient option 4,5 and 6. Below is the dialog showing how to customize your graph. Just select the
option “User defined graph template as default” and click on the “Chart Editor…” button to design your graph.
Once it is done just close the “Chart Editor”, click on the button “Save graph template” and click on “Apply” to
accept.

10 – The CYMCAP Menu  171


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

The Window menu


The Window menu allows managing how executions appear on the screen, if more than one are open.

172  10 – The CYMCAP Menu


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

By default, executions are displayed in Cascade.The


CYMCAP menu for opened executions
Once an execution is opened, the CYMCAP menu is expanded to accommodate the execution-related
activities.

The menu items are File, Edit, View, Options, Window and Help.

The File menu - Execution


By now accessing the CYMCAP menu item File, it is seen that the previously displayed menu is expanded
with execution management options.

10 – The CYMCAP Menu  173


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

The Edit menu - Execution


By accessing the CYMCAP menu item Edit, it is seen that the menu comprises all the options to modify the
execution title, specify the solution options and access the execution data. Those options can also be
accessed through the quick access icons located on the Execution bar.

The View menu - Execution


The CYMCAP menu entry View is dedicated to modifying the installation data screen layout.

The entries it features could be used as follows:

Installation Dashed Show or Hide the dashed axes of the installation


Axes
X-Y Graduated Axes Show or Hide the X-Y graduated axes.
Underground effect Show underground effect below the earth surface (shading).
Cable Monitor Enable the cable monitor.

174  10 – The CYMCAP Menu


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Dimensions Show or Hide ductbank/backfill/casing/tunnel dimensions.


Approximate Show or Hide approximate temperature field after calculation is done.
Temperature Field
Label Grid Enable grid for aligning ampacity/temperature labels.
Installation Drag & Show or Hide installation drag & drop toolbox.
Drop toolbox
No Labels Disable the display of ampacity/temperature labels.
All Labels Enable the display of all ampacity/temperature labels.
Only label(s) of cable(s) Enable the display of the ampacity/temperature labels for the selected cable(s)
selected only
Speedbar When selected, displays the Execution bar at the top of the work area.
Toolbar When selected, detaches the execution toolbar from the top of the window to
place it in the work area; the user can reposition it anywhere in the window.
Execution Number To display the execution number in the Title text of the execution window.
Steady State Report To generate the steady state report (if enabled/successfully submitted) for the
execution.
Transient Report To generate the transient report (if enabled/successfully submitted) for the
execution.

The Options menu - Execution


The CYMCAP menu item “Options” allows setting how the installation data are presented, what system of
units is to be used and what is the frequency of the AC system.

10 – The CYMCAP Menu  175


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Installation This item represents the default display option for the CYMCAP interface. The dialog box
data on Left containing the installation data (i.e. cable IDs, cable coordinates, temperatures, etc.) is
displayed on the left-hand side of the screen, with the pictorial representation of the
installation to the right.
Installation The dialog box containing the installation data (i.e. cable IDs, cable coordinates,
Data on temperatures, etc.) is displayed on the right-hand side of the screen, with the pictorial
Right representation of the installation to the left.
Installation This item represents the default display option for the CYMCAP interface. The group of
type buttons installation-type icons on the Execution bar located at the top of the installation windows
on the left appears on the left-hand side. This option applies only when the installation data or
multiple installation data or tunnel installation data dialog box is open side by side with the
installation window.

Installation The group of installation-type icons on the Execution bar located at the top of the
type buttons installation window appears on the right-hand side. This option applies only when the
on the right installation data or multiple installation data or tunnel installation data dialog box is open
side by side with the installation window.

Units To select either Imperial or Metric as the system of units. An alternative way to toggle
between the two is to click on the unit name displayed to the right of the status bar.
Frequency To enter the frequency of the AC electrical system for thermal studies. An alternative way
to achieve the same is to click on Fq= displayed in the top-left corner of the installation
window.

176  10 – The CYMCAP Menu


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Cyclic To select a particular option for cyclic loading. The Neher-McGrath approach is the default.
Loading

Electrical By default, in CYMCAP, the electrical interaction between different circuits is not
interaction considered unless at least one of the circuits has multiple cables per phase. Only the
between mutual heating effect between circuits is accounted for in the cables’ thermal rating as per
circuits IEC Standards. The option “electrical interaction between circuits” allows accounting for
this effect even when the circuits don’t have multiple cables per phase. In this case, the
mutual heating effect is also considered along with the electrical interaction between
circuits.

Percentage To select the percentage of duct fill permitted for ducted cables.
of Duct Fill

If a duct fill of 100% is assumed, the program will verify the total external diameter of the
cable, or the equivalent of a trefoil arrangement, with the internal diameter of the duct prior
to permitting the placement of any cable in the duct. If a different duct-fill percentage is
specified, the program will compare the total external diameter of the cable with the
internal duct diameter multiplied by the duct-fill factor. This is a precaution taken due to the
fact that some margin is normally required between the duct and the cable so that the
latter can be pulled in the duct.

10 – The CYMCAP Menu  177


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

The duct-fill factor can therefore determine whether a cable is eligible to be positioned
within a given duct or not, during the editing process of the installation. Note that the
program will ignore any inconsistencies and/or violations if the duct-fill factor is modified
after the data has already been entered.
Global short Allows the user to change the global short circuit time used in the steady-state calculation.
circuit time (This short circuit time data is not used by the add-on module SHORT CIRCUIT)

Customize The user can define global installation defaults used at creation time for installation types
installation like ductbank, backfill, multiple casings and multiple ductbanks/backfills (MDB). General
defaults on default ratings (i.e. ambient temperature and native soil) can be defined in three different
creation groups which is default, summer, and winter.
Customize The user can define global defaults for the Isothermal Curves that will be used at the
Isothermal creation of the isotherms for installation types that handle their display.
Curves
Enlarge/ This option applies only for MDB installation using the finite element method for
reduce calculation. Sometimes, calculation of an MDB installation cannot be solved due to
default installation depth and default boundaries used to make the calculation. This option allows
boundaries the user to change the boundaries of his installation by enlarging it or reducing it until the
for MDB solver finds the final solution.

Excel Report Select the desired language for the Excel report between English (default) or French.
language

178  10 – The CYMCAP Menu


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Simulation/ To select important simulation control parameters and the generation of a simulation
Report control report. These facilities are provided for the eventuality the numerical solution
Control – algorithm does not converge.
Steady State

Customize installation defaults on creation


For General Ratings

10 – The CYMCAP Menu  179


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

For Backfill

For Ductbank

180  10 – The CYMCAP Menu


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

For Duct

For Trough

10 – The CYMCAP Menu  181


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

For Casing

For Duct in Casing

182  10 – The CYMCAP Menu


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Simulation control parameters


 Convergence can be facilitated by relaxing (increasing) either the current or temperature
convergence tolerance thresholds. By default, these steady state thresholds are established to 1 A and
0.1 C respectively. For Transients, the tolerance is set to 0.5 C. If increased, the program may
converge for more cases at the expense of a less accurate solution. Still, generally a good estimate of the
expected currents is obtained.
 The iteration report can be generated in order to view at what point the iterative procedure starts
diverging. Quite often, the divergence manifests itself very close to the solution so once again a very
good estimate of the expected currents can also be obtained through the iteration report.
 The number of iterations can also be increased/decreased at will. However, experience has shown
that 100 iterations are more than sufficient for steady state and 50, for transients. In fact, the program
normally converges in less than 10 iterations.
 Unless valid reasons exist for modifying them, it is strongly recommended that the simulation
parameters control settings be left at their default values.

10 – The CYMCAP Menu  183


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

IEC scope extended

When the IEC Scope Extended option is selected (default), some particular cases of IEC Standards are
treated using the general or detailed formulae from the same standard when applicable. This is done for
different reasons:
- to extend the scope of the standard and cover cases which are not fully considered by IEC,
- to apply the general formulae in replacement of the formula developed for a specific case with
restricted scope,
- to provide more detailed ratings in cases where IEC allows neglecting some parameters to simplify
hand calculations.
Below are listed the differences when the option is selected:
Option “IEC scope extended” selected Option “IEC scope extended”not selected
Dielectric losses are always calculated. Dielectric losses are taken into account according to
the Table 3 of IEC 60287-1-1, edition 2.1.
For groups of buried cables touching and equally For groups of buried cables touching and equally
loaded, the external thermal resistance T4 is loaded, the external thermal resistance T4 is
computed as per IEC Standard 60287-2-1© edition computed as per IEC Standard 60287-2-1© edition
2.0, sub-clause 4.2.2 for the self thermal resistance 2.0, sub-clause 4.2.4. This implies that the thermal
and sub-clause 4.2.3.2 for the mutual thermal resistance of the serving T3 and the thermal
resistance. resistance of the insulation T1 are multiplied by the
recommended factor when applicable.
For cables with magnetic armour, the AC resistance For cables with magnetic armour, the AC resistance
of conductor is computed as per IEC Standard of conductor is computed as per IEC Standard
60287-1-1© edition 2.1, sub-clause 2.1.5. The latter 60287-1-1© edition 2.1, sub-clause 2.1.
implies that the skin and proximity effect factors (ys
and yp) are increased by a factor 1.5, like for pipe-
type cables.

184  10 – The CYMCAP Menu


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Option “IEC scope extended” selected Option “IEC scope extended”not selected
For cables in magnetic ducts, the AC resistance of For cables in magnetic ducts, the AC resistance of
conductor is computed as per IEC Standard 60287- conductor is computed using a factor called “Rac
1-1© edition 2.1, sub-clause 2.1.5. The latter implies factor for magnetic ducts” that multiplies the skin and
that the skin and proximity effect factors (ys and yp) proximity effect factors (ys and yp). This factor is set
are increased by a factor 1.5, like for pipe-type to 1.5 by default, like for pipe-type cables, but it can
cables. be modified in the menu Preferences.

At any time, the option “IEC scope extended” can be enabled or disabled for all executions by going back to
the Navigator window and choosing one of the following options via the right-click-menu:
 Apply the extended IEC scope option to all existing executions
 Remove the extended IEC scope option from all existing executions
In the same menu, the option “IEC scope extended” can be set to be applied by default to new
studies/executions. Finally, the value of the “Rac factor for magnetic ducts” can also be set and applied to all
existing executions and/or new studies and executions. This factor is used only when the “IEC scope
extended” option is enabled and is used to multiply the skin and proximity effect factors (ys and yp) of cables
in magnetic ducts, as in a factor of 1.5 is applied for pipe-type cables.

10 – The CYMCAP Menu  185


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Designate the system of units for the session


CYMCAP permits the use of either the Metric or the Imperial system of units in order to facilitate data
entry and avoid unnecessary conversions that otherwise would have to be done by the user. North American
practice is still geared towards the Imperial system of units, while European and International practice favors
the Metric System.
When the Imperial system of units is used, cable dimension and related data must be entered in KCMIL and
inches, while cable installation geometrical data must be entered in feet. For the Metric system, cable
dimensions and related data are entered in mm and cable installation geometrical data in meters. In order to
designate the system of units, activate the program and when the CYMCAP navigator comes up on screen,
point to the status bar where the word Metric (or Imperial) appears and click on it. This is a toggle
switch that reverts to the alternative system of units.
Note that during the simulation, the program permits to switch the system of units thus assuring even greater
flexibility.

Designate the AC system frequency for the session


The frequency of the AC electrical system is an important parameter in ampacity calculations for power
cables in alternating current installations. Dielectric losses, AC conductor resistance and other important
parameters are a direct function of the system frequency. In order to designate the desired frequency once
the program navigator is opened, click on the area of the status bar labeled Fq (located next to the
system of units) and a dialog box will permit to enter any frequency desired.

Designate AC conductor resistance values


It is by invoking the AC frequency dialog box that CYMCAP permits the use of the IEC 60228 standard to
obtain standard values of conductor resistance for the calculations (see chapter 3 for applicable restrictions).
Another option is to let the program calculate the conductor resistance.

186  10 – The CYMCAP Menu


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

11 – CYMCAP Utilities

Introduction
CYMCAP provides an array of facilities to manage the database files. It uses powerful functions to aid data
exchange between users and computers. Furthermore, the program is quite flexible in accommodating North
American and International design practices by supporting user-defined ac system frequencies, International
standards for conductor resistance values, and the Metric and Imperial systems of units.

Designate the working directory for CYMCAP


CYMCAP provides the facility to work in more than one directory. The option to change the working directory
permits a classification of databases and studies as well as modularity if more than one user works in parallel.
In the former case, Cable, Duct Bank, Heat Source, Load curve and installation data can be kept safely in
different partitions while in the latter, integration of important and relevant studies becomes transparent. In
order to designate the CYMCAP working directory, open the Navigator and go to the Utilities tab. By default
the program considers as current (working) directory, the directory specified by the user during the
installation process. The working directory appears at the top of the navigator for reference.
In order to change the working directory, click on the Browse button that is shown in section Change
Current directory to and using the browser, select the new working partition. The same task can be
accomplished by accessing the dropdown list displaying the directories already chosen in the past (not only
for the current session but for previous sessions as well). Once the working directory is selected, click on the
Apply button to make it effective.

Note: You have the possibility to create a new directory directly in the browsing window.

11 – CYMCAP Utilities  187


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Backup the contents of the working directory to another


directory
CYMCAP permits to back up the content of the current working directory to another, the target directory, in
order to protect it against potentially undesired modifications. Click on the Browse button under section
Backup current directory to this new location and select the desired directory. If the target directory
doesn’t exist yet, you have the possibility to create it in the browsing window.
Once the target directory is created, click on the Apply button of the Navigator to backup the databases of the
working directory.

Notes:  In order to copy the content of a directory different from the current working
directory, designate that directory first as the working directory and then proceed.

Append a database to another database


When the need to append the complete databases of one directory to another directory arises, it is not
necessary to resort to selective tagging since this can be tedious and prone to errors. CYMCAP offers a
dedicated facility to accomplish the task. It is named Append this database to the current directory. The
term “current directory” is synonymous to the term “working directory”. This option permits therefore the
merging of two sets of databases, each one being in a different directory. In order to accomplish this task, the
source directory (the directory containing the database to be appended) needs to be selected with the
browser and the target directory (the directory containing the database to be expanded) need to be
designated as the working directory. CYMCAP also offers the possibility to selectively Copy selected
items to a given data base (Cables, Load Curves, Shapes and/or Studies.

Tag specific items from the Libraries


In some occasions when specific items of the CYMCAP library need to be transferred to a different partition,
CYMCAP permits a selective transfer instead of copying the entire libraries. This is accomplished with the tag
option, which enables selective actions on the libraries items.
Assume for instance, that several Cables need to be tagged. In order to do that we open the Navigator, enter
the Utilities tab and check the Tag mode enabled option.

Once the Tag mode is enabled, switch to the Cable Library tab of the navigator and start tagging the entries
of interest. To tag a particular entry, just click on its name.

188  11 – CYMCAP Utilities


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

In order to tag sequentially, highlight an entry by clicking on it and press T on the keyboard to tag it. Once the
entry is tagged, the highlight will be on the next entry. Press letter T again to go on. Ctrl-T will tag all the
library entries, Ctrl-U will un-tag all entries. The same function can be accomplished by accessing the pop-up
menu with a right-click within the working area of the Navigator.

11 – CYMCAP Utilities  189


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Copy selected items to a given data base


The need may arise to transfer data from one directory to another in order to complement already existing
databases. For instance, several important cable types or Load Curves may need to be transferred to studies
in another directory. In order to append to a given data base any set of data, the first step is to tag the
desired entries from the source database and the second step is to append the tagged entries to the target
database.
Assume for instance that several Load curves are to be transferred from the working directory E:\CAPWIN to
the database of the Load curves in the existing directory E:\TEST. We bring the CYMCAP navigator, enter
the Option Utilities, designate as working directory the source directory E:\CAPWIN and enable the tag mode.
Then we enter the Load Curve Library and tag the Load curves to be appended. Since the Load curve is
composed of shapes the Load curve needs to be expanded first. To do so, double-click on it and then click on
each shape belonging to that Load curve.

We then return to the Utilities activity and copy the tagged items to the existing target directory E:\TEST.

190  11 – CYMCAP Utilities


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Notes:  If a Load curve or Heat Source is transferred, all the shapes belonging to the Load
Curve or Heat Source are also transferred.
 If a study is transferred all the associated cables, duct bank, heat source and load
curves are automatically appended to the target directory databases as well.
 When items are copied to a newly created directory, no other database items will be
copied to that directory except the ones tagged. If, for instance, some cables are
tagged, only the tagged cables will be transferred to the new directory. No duct banks,
heat sources, load curves, shapes and studies will be transferred at all.

11 – CYMCAP Utilities  191


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

12 – Defaults for Various Types of


Cables

Defaults – Overview
It is not uncommon to find that, when entering a new cable in the library of the program, some manufacturer
data are absent. Furthermore, when preliminary cable studies are performed, detailed cable data are not
always available despite the fact that they are needed for ampacity calculations. The program is, in any case,
in position to recommend default values to be used for the various cable components.
This Appendix describes these default values for the types of cables supported. Note however, that the
recommended defaults represent approximate reasonable choices based on prevailing manufacturing
practice. They should be used only in the absence of more detailed information. If the manufacturer data
sheets are available for the cable at hand, the user is advised to override the program defaults and enter the
exact data.
Finally, one should bear in mind that classifying the cables according to the types depicted below should not
be viewed as rigid since there will be types of cables which can be allocated to more than one category.

12 – Defaults for Various Types of Cables  193


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

13 – Introduction – Additional
Modules
This User’s Guide CYMCAP for Windows - Add-on Modules is a complement to the CYMCAP for Windows
manual. The document is intended to help those who have acquired any of the add-on modules of CYMCAP.
Although the descriptions follow a tutorial format, it is not intended as a self-contained document. Beginners
necessarily will rely on the CYMCAP for Windows User’s Guide to learn the operating principles of CYMCAP.
This guide specifically deals with the following installation and analysis add-on modules of CYMCAP:
Installation add-on module:
 The Multiple Duct Banks module (MDB) to determine the steady state ampacity of cables laid in an
environment of non-uniform resistivity as is the case in presence of several duct banks and/or backfills.
 The Cables in Tunnels module to determine the temperature, steady state, cyclic and transient ampacity
of cables installed in unventilated tunnels.
 The Cable in Troughs module. Allows the user to determine the thermal rating of cables installed in filled
and unfilled troughs. For filled troughs it is possible to compute the temperature and steady state
unequally loaded ampacity. Cyclic loading is considered through the use of load factors. For unfilled and
unventilated troughs, the module can compute the equally loaded ampacity or temperature when the
cables are equally loaded and no load factors are permitted.
 The Multiple Casings module (MCAS) to determine the steady state unequally loaded ampacity and/or
temperature of cables installed in non-magnetic casing.
Analysis add-on module:
 The Duct Bank Optimizer module (OPT) to determine the placement of several circuits within a duct
bank so that certain optimal criteria are fulfilled.
 The Short Circuit Cable Rating module (SCR) dedicated to the calculation of the adiabatic and non-
adiabatic short-circuit ratings.
 The Magnetic Fields module (EMF). Once an ampacity or a temperature run has been performed, the
module computes the magnetic flux density at any point on or above the ground for an underground cable
installation using the current computed or specified in the steady state simulation.
 The Cables Crossing module (XING) that allows the user to determine the steady state ampacity of
circuits crossing each other.
 The Cables Impedance Calculation module (ZMAT) that determines the electrical parameters for cables
necessary for performing network studies at the power frequency (50/60 Hz).
 The Soil Dry Out Prevention module available only with the MDB installation module. It allows to rate
the installation based on a temperature constraint at the duct bank/backfill boundary with the native soil
so that no point in the soil can exceed the moisture migration temperature limit.

13 – Introduction – Additional Modules  195


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

14 – The Multiple Duct Banks


Module

Introduction
The multiple duct banks module (MDB) is an add-on to CYMCAP that allows the user to determine the steady
state ampacity of cables laid in an environment of non-uniform resistivity as is the case in presence of several
duct banks and/or backfills. More specifically, the module uses a finite element model to compute the values
of T4 (the external thermal resistance of the cable) for all the cables in the installation. Then the IEC
standardized solution method is applied to determine the ampacity or the operating temperature depending
on the user's requirements.
The module models rectangular areas in soil of different thermal resistivities. These areas are called “soil
layers” and are used to represent the following items:
- Duct banks
- Backfills
- Filled casings
- Filled troughs
Summary of features
 Capable of modeling cables in ducts, in pipes.
 Capable of modeling several heat sources/heat sinks.
 Computation of the steady state ampacity or temperature.
 Computation of transient analyses.
 Drawing of isothermal contours computed with a finite-element model of the installation.
The multiple duck bank module (MDB) will require a longer time to compute T4 than the standardized
procedure as it is based on a finite element procedure. The calculation time is very much dependent on the
number of cables in the installation and on the computer speed and memory. Cases with many cables might
exceed the 60,000 maximum elements allowed in the finite-element procedure. There is no easy rule to
determine how many elements will be required for a specific installation. However, the more cables in an
installation the more elements will be required. The MDB module is not intended for the solution of large
(atypical) cable installations consisting of many cables.

Notes:  A cable must necessarily be inside a “soil layer” and cannot be directly modeled in the
native soil.
 The circular shape of the filled casing will be approximated with a rectangular shape.
 The steady-state ampacity mode currently supported in MDB installations is Unequally
loaded.

14 – The Multiple Duct Banks Module  197


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Creating a Standard Multiple Duct Bank


In this section an example of the multiple duct banks/backfills module in operation is illustrated. The
installation has two 2x2 duct banks aligned with two backfills; one backfill at the top with ‘asphalt’ texture and
one backfill between the duct banks using ‘soil’ texture.
In the next page, step-by-step instructions will show how to create this type of installation.

198  14 – The Multiple Duct Banks Module


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Creating a multiple duct bank


Open the Navigator to access the Study tab. Click the button New Study to create a new installation. To
start from scratch, answer No to the question.

Enter the Study ID, Study title and Execution title to identify the execution.

Click OK to continue. The Solution Option dialog box will be displayed. For this example, select the
Unequally loaded and click OK.

Click the Multiple Ductbanks/backfills and soil layers button in the Execution bar to start building a
multiple duct bank or backfill installation.

14 – The Multiple Duct Banks Module  199


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

The Installation setup dialog box that is displayed next allows you to define how many duct banks and
backfills are used in the installation. For this example, type 2 for ductbanks and 2 for backfills or soil
layers.

Once this is done, click OK to continue.


Then, CYMCAP will ask you to indicate the Ambient temperature and the Native soil thermal resistivity.
For this example, the default values will be accepted. Click OK to continue.

200  14 – The Multiple Duct Banks Module


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

The next Installation setup dialog box will allow defining how many cables are used in the installation. Enter
1 three-phase circuit and 3 single-phase circuit(s) (one core) and click on OK to continue.

14 – The Multiple Duct Banks Module  201


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Installing duct banks


In the multiple duct banks mode, it is important to understand that cables cannot be installed until at least one
duct bank or one backfill has been built. All cables need to be installed inside duct banks and/or backfills. If
you want to install cables in the native soil, you will need to create a backfill using the same resistivity
as the native soil.

By clicking on the Multiple Duct Banks/Backfills Installation Data icon in the Execution bar, the list of
soil layers in the installation is displayed.

The tabs on the left side of the screen allow you to switch quickly between the soil layers list and the cables
list.

202  14 – The Multiple Duct Banks Module


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

The Multiple ductbanks/backfills installation data window, on the left of the screen, presents the list of the
“soil layers” just created. For our example, there are four undefined layers.
The layer types available are:

STD Standard duct bank. Selected from the Ductbank Library.


NSTD Non-standard duct bank. Dimensions are entered manually directly in the MDB installation, and
different duct sizes can be used.
BFILL Backfill/soil layer.
TRGH Filled trough layer which allows different resistivities for the filling material and the frame
material of the trough.
NSTC Filled casing layer which allows specifying the dimensions of a circular shape in the MDB
installation. However it will be treated as an equivalent rectangular shape by the program.

Note: Another layer called DUCT is available in the soil layer list for purpose of design flexibility
but unlike the other layers it should necessarily be placed in another soil layer and cannot
be in direct contact with the native soil.

One or more layers can be selected at the same time from the list. When one item only is selected, CYMCAP
allows to Edit, to Delete or to set the installation of the layer by pressing the respective button “Backfill/
Ductbank/ Trough/ Duct/ Casing Installation” according to the layer type. When more than one item is
selected, CYMCAP will only allow to Delete the group of layers.
At any time the user can add new layers to the existing ones by pressing Add. Finally, it is possible to restart
from a completely new installation by clicking on Setup new.
For this example, select the first item on the list and click the Ductbank Installation button.
The ductbank form will appear. The current layer to be installed is a standard ductbank i.e. a ductbank from
the duct bank library.

Note: All standard duct banks should have been created previously in the ductbank library in order
to be available in the Library list.

In the example, select the duct bank “(19) DUCTBANK (2 X 2)” from the dropdown list named Library: and
change the X Centre position of the duct bank to (- 2.0).

14 – The Multiple Duct Banks Module  203


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Click the Next ductbank button to install the second duct bank. All standard duct banks can be installed at
the same time before clicking the Apply button. At first one will notice that the second duct bank overlaps the
first one. Move the X Centre position to (2.0). The duct bank colored in green is the current selection and thus
we are working on it. Once this is done, click Apply to confirm that all the work for the duct banks is done.

Note: The option in blue Set current ductbank next to ductbank on from the figure above
allows the user to move the current selected ductbank side by side with another ductbank.
Use the dropdown list to see all choices available and select for instance the Left item to
move the current ductbank (green) to the left starting at the right edge of the other ductbank.

204  14 – The Multiple Duct Banks Module


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

The first two layers of the list have been installed properly as two standard duct banks. Let us now define the
two other layers as backfills.

Installing backfills or soil layers


For the current example, select the first undefined layer identified by <none> from the list and click the
Backfill Installation button.

14 – The Multiple Duct Banks Module  205


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

The Backfill selector form will appear. The current layer to be installed is a backfill.
Note that there is no backfill library. The list of backfill areas available around the layer(s) already installed is
generated dynamically according to the existing installation. In this example, there are five regions (B1 to B5)
available to be used as a backfills. Let us select the region B1 from the list to continue the example.

More information is required to be entered before confirming the creation of the new backfill.
 Layer Name (mandatory, 10 characters max.)
 Layer Caption (optional, 25 characters max.)
 Layer Color/Layer Texture (optional)
The layer name is mandatory and should be filled with a meaningful name. The layer caption is optional and
can be used to add extra information that can help to identify the layer. A layer color can be used to associate
a specific color to a backfill. Alternatively, a layer texture can be used to associate a specific texture to a
backfill.
After selecting the region of interest, CYMCAP allows the user to change manually the position of the backfill
when the default coordinates are not the correct ones. See picture below under section “Change manually
coordinates”.

206  14 – The Multiple Duct Banks Module


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

The bottom position of region B1 needs to be changed to 0.2 because the layer is asphalt at the top of the
installation representing the street pavement. When this is done, click on the Next backfill button.
The second layer will be soil. Then, select the region B3 that is between the two duct banks and complete the
required information as before.

Once this is done, click Apply to accept all the work done.

14 – The Multiple Duct Banks Module  207


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

The last two layers of the list have been installed properly as two backfills. Let’s now define the missing data
for duct banks.

Note: To see a complete description of any of the layers directly on the installation, place the
cursor over the layer of interest. A label will appear showing the layer name, caption, layer
type, resistivity, width and height.

208  14 – The Multiple Duct Banks Module


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Complete duct bank data


The user needs to select the second duct bank from the list. There are many ways to edit the duct bank data.
Choose the best method for you:
 Double-click the current item selected in the list of layers.
 Click the Edit button at bottom.
 Click on the layer of interest directly in the installation display window.

For the example, click on Edit to complete the missing duct bank data. Enter 0.9 for Thermal resistivity and
select PVC duct in concrete for the Duct construction. Click OK to continue.

Click on the duct bank located on the left side of the installation to complete the duct bank data. Enter the
same values as for the first duct bank and click on OK to continue.

14 – The Multiple Duct Banks Module  209


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

To see the thermal resistivity used in all layers of the installation at the same time, click on the radio button
Show resistivity of layers as shown in the figure below highlighted with a red box.

The resistivity is displayed in three ways:


 On the left hand side of the screen, the thermal resistivity of each layer of the installation appears in a list.
 On the installation display window, the thermal resistivity of each layer appears graphically in the
installation (where spaces are large enough to accommodate the text).
 By placing the cursor over the layer of interest in the installation window the resistivity appears on the
displayed label.

Note: The same philosophy applies for the layer caption (radio button: Show caption of layers).

210  14 – The Multiple Duct Banks Module


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Completing backfill data


Before editing, make sure to select the third item of the list, which corresponds to the first backfill. Double-
click the item selected to edit and change the backfill thermal resistivity to 1.2 and click on OK to continue.

Repeat the procedure to change the backfill thermal resistivity of the second backfill. Change it to 1.5. The
screen below shows the final data for the thermal resistivity of all layers.

14 – The Multiple Duct Banks Module  211


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Installation of cables
Before installing any cables, the user needs to tell CYMCAP in which layer the selected cables will be
installed.
To select layer(s) directly in the installation display window:
 Select one layer - Press and hold the “Shift” key and click on the layer of interest.
 Select many layers - Press and hold the “Ctrl” key while you click consecutively on all the layers of
interest. Clicking again on a selected layer will unselect it.
For the example, select the duct bank located on the left. The selected duct bank will be highlighted in green.
Click on the Installation data icon in the Execution bar. Select the first three cables of circuit no. 1 from
the list of cables on the left-hand side of the screen. Click Edit button to make a cable selection from the
cable library.

212  14 – The Multiple Duct Banks Module


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

The cable library will pop up with all the available single core cables. Select a cable in the list and click on OK.
You will notice that some cables are not available for selection because their dimensions are not suitable for
the ducts dimensions.

As you see, the first three cables are installed into the first duct bank. The next step is to install the last three
cables into the second duct bank. Before editing the cables, select the second duct bank using the previously
explained procedure (press and hold "Shift" and click on the duct bank).
Once the second duct bank is selected, select the last three cables from the list and click on Edit

14 – The Multiple Duct Banks Module  213


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Select a cable in the list and click on OK.

Complete the specific installation data


Next step is to complete the specific installation data for the two types of cables used in the installation. To do

so, just click on the Specific Installation Data icon in the Execution bar.
Below is the screen to enter the specific installation data of the cables. For the first cable type, under section
Sheath/Shield Bonding select an available item in the dropdown list corresponding to the bonding of the
cable, for example 1-CON, No bonding. Once this is done, click the Previous Cable button located at the
bottom of the dialog box.

Note: In this example as the first cable type to be edited in the list belongs to a single-phase
circuit, the only bonding that will be available in the list is No Bonding.

214  14 – The Multiple Duct Banks Module


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

For the last cable type, under section Sheath/Shield Bonding, select item 1-CON, sheaths bonded ends,
triangular configuration. Next, under section Spacing of cables in section, select item Spacing is even and
click OK to accept all changes.

14 – The Multiple Duct Banks Module  215


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

How to move location of linear dimensions of any layer

As you can see above many linear dimensions are not properly located on the graph. It is possible to change
the positions for all of them or hide some of them not desired.
Click on the left duct bank to open the Cables in multiple ductbanks/backfills window. Then, click on
Linear Dimensions Properties to be able to move his Height dimension label to the left side.

216  14 – The Multiple Duct Banks Module


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

14 – The Multiple Duct Banks Module  217


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Change the height label position by selecting “Left” as shown above and click on OK. Click OK again to save
changes and return to the installation.

How to hide linear dimensions of any layer


Here is the procedure to hide both horizontal and vertical dimensions of the middle backfill.

In the installation window, click on the middle backfill to open the Cables in multiple ductbanks/backfills
window. Then, click on Linear Dimensions Properties to be able to hide the dimension labels.

218  14 – The Multiple Duct Banks Module


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Hide both width and height position labels by selecting “None” in the corresponding dropdown lists and click
on OK. Click OK again to save changes and return to the installation.
Here’s the final display which is clearer.

14 – The Multiple Duct Banks Module  219


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Save and start the simulation


Before starting the simulation, make sure you save the execution by clicking on the save icon at the bottom
left corner of the application:

In the following pop-up window select Save as is and then on OK.

Solve the simulation by clicking on the Solver icon in the Execution bar. Once the computations are
finished you will access the Steady-State Report by clicking on the corresponding button at the bottom left of
the installation window, or you can choose to access the report in Excel format by clicking on the Excel
Report button at the bottom center.
Congratulations! The first example has been completed successfully. Close the execution and make sure to
save if you have not done it already.
Back to the navigator with the new study just created.

220  14 – The Multiple Duct Banks Module


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Creating a Non-Standard Multiple Duct Bank


The second example of the multiple duct banks module will use a non-standard duct bank with many backfills
around it. Different textures will be used for backfills.
From the Navigator, make the current selection to the last execution just created and click the New
Execution button. The new execution being created will be a template of the current selection.

14 – The Multiple Duct Banks Module  221


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Building the installation


Enter an Execution title to describe this execution no. 2 and click OK to continue.

As you see, the new execution did not start from scratch. In this example, a non-standard duct bank is
required. Because none of the layers is a non-standard duct bank we need to delete them all. Click the Select
All button to select all items from the list, click the Delete button and answer Yes to the question. To add the
new layers click the Add button.

222  14 – The Multiple Duct Banks Module


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Installing non-standard duct banks


Enter “1” for non-standard duct bank.

Click Ok to accept and click the “Ductbank Installation” for the first item on the list.
The non-standard duct bank can be built manually or selected from the duct bank library.
Please note that no link will be kept between the non-standard duct bank being created and the duct bank
selected from the library (CYMCAP uses a copy of the height and width values of the item selected from the
duct bank library).
For this example, select the duct bank “(3) DUCTBANK (2 X 3)” from the “Library” list and click Apply to
accept.

14 – The Multiple Duct Banks Module  223


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Complete non-standard duct bank data


Now it is the time to complete the non-standard duct bank data by changing the thermal resistivity. There are
many ways to edit the duct bank data. Choose the best method for you:
 Double-click the current item selected in the list of layers.
 Click the Edit button at bottom.
 Click on the layer of interest directly in the installation display window.
For the example, click on Edit to complete the missing duct bank data. Enter 0.9 for Thermal resistivity and
click OK to accept.

224  14 – The Multiple Duct Banks Module


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Installation of cables
First click on the Installation Data icon in the Execution bar to install the cables.

Select the last three cables from the list and click on the Delete button to remove them because they are not
needed for this example.
Select the first three cables from the list and click on the Edit button to install them.

14 – The Multiple Duct Banks Module  225


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Select the cable “(2) 230 KV LPOF CABLE WITH 1 COPPER CONDUCTOR” from the Cable library. Type at
the bottom the location of this group of cables into the non-standard ductbank and accept the changes by
clicking on OK.

226  14 – The Multiple Duct Banks Module


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Complete the specific installation data


The next step is to complete the specific installation data for the cables used in the installation. To do so, just
click on the Specific Installation Data icon in the Execution bar. Do not forget to enter the duct
dimensions and click OK to accept the changes when the information is complete.

14 – The Multiple Duct Banks Module  227


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Automatic installation of backfills


There is a special option in the multiple duct banks mode to automatically create all backfills. CYMCAP
computes for you all the possible rectangles that can be created within the existing installation. The purpose
of this option is to save time during the creation process of the installation. Let us use this option for the
example.
Click on the Automatic creation of backfills around ductbanks button and answer Yes to clear all existing
backfills and generate them automatically around duct banks. It is also possible to answer NO to the question
if the user wants to keep the existing backfills and generate only the missing ones.

As you can see, CYMCAP has generated automatically four backfills, which are added to the list. All
coordinates of those backfills have been calculated. If one or more backfills is not needed you can delete it
until you obtain the appropriate installation. In our example, all backfills will be kept.

228  14 – The Multiple Duct Banks Module


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

You might not be satisfied with the default color used for the backfills and would like to change them for
different colors and/or textures. To do so, select the second item of the list corresponding to area ‘B1’ located
at the top of the installation.

Click on the Backfill Installation button and you will be able to change the layer texture or color.
Click on the Layer Texture radio button to tell CYMCAP to work with textures rather than with colors. Select,
for example, Soil (Type 1) from the layer textures predefined list. As soon as an item is selected, the backfill is
refreshed with the proper texture. This gives an idea to the user on how the installation will look before
accepting the changes.

14 – The Multiple Duct Banks Module  229


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Enter a meaningful name into the layer caption corresponding to the texture chosen. Open the layer caption
list to select the ‘Soil’ item.

You can click on the Next backfill button to change the texture of the next layer.
Select “Sand (Type 2)” from the layer texture. Open the layer caption list and select ‘Sand’, for example. Click
on the Next backfill button to change layer texture of the next backfill.

230  14 – The Multiple Duct Banks Module


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Click on the Next backfill button to change layer texture of the next one.
Select “Sand (Type 2)” from the layer texture list. Open the layer caption list and select ‘Sand’. Next, click on
the Next backfill button to change texture of the next layer.

Select “Green stone” from the layer texture list. Open the layer caption list and select ‘Stone’. Now you can
click on the Apply button to accept all the changes and display the final view.

14 – The Multiple Duct Banks Module  231


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

It is now the best time to save this new execution.


There is an option to display all layer captions just entered on the installation. Click on the Show caption of
layers radio button to display all layer captions.

Solve it to see the results and close the execution. You will be back to the Navigator screen with the new
execution just created.

232  14 – The Multiple Duct Banks Module


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Creating a new job template


A Job template library working only with MDB is included in the Navigator. This library is to be built by the
user. The Job template feature allows you to build an MDB installation without cables that can be inserted
later on in one or more installations.
This library can contain four different groups of job templates. The first group is for non-standard ductbanks,
the second group is for casings, the third group is for troughs and last group is for any other kind of MDB
installation). You can create different sizes of non-standard ductbanks, casings or troughs to fill in your library.
The first example demonstrates how to create a job template for a trough installation. Click on New button to
create a new job template.

14 – The Multiple Duct Banks Module  233


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Enter “1” to add a new trough to the MDB installation and click the OK button to accept. Select the first item in
the list and click the Trough Installation button to enter the data for the trough just created.

Enter the data as shown above and click Apply to accept.


Click on the highlighted “disk” icon to save your first template into the Job template library.

234  14 – The Multiple Duct Banks Module


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

You need to specify to CYMCAP in which template group you want to save that installation. For this example,
we have built a trough installation; choose the option Add to “troughs” group and enter an execution Title.
Once done, click on OK to save it. Close the installation. The Navigator will show the new jobs template just
added.
CYMCAP allows saving a job template in four different group as follows:
 Add to “non-standard ductbank” group
 Add to “casing” group
 Add to “troughs” group
 Add to “others” group
After saving, the job template is shown in its corresponding group in the Job template tab of the Navigator
The example below the new job template added in the Group template for trough.

The user can edit or delete a template anytime from that list.

14 – The Multiple Duct Banks Module  235


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Edit and save a template as a new one


CYMCAP allows you to edit any template and saves it as a new one in the Jobs template library.
Click on Edit to edit the template just created and change the size of the trough. Select the File > Save
Template As… menu item.

Click on OK to save. Close the installation and return to the Navigator to see the new job template just added
to the library.

236  14 – The Multiple Duct Banks Module


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

How to insert a job template into a MDB installation


Create a new MDB installation as explained above under section Creating a Standard Multiple Duct Bank
except that this time check the “Job template” check box only and click “OK”.

There are three ways to insert a job template into a MDB installation:
1. Move the cursor over the list of layers located on the left side as shown below and right click to open the
popup menu. Click on the “Add new Job Template” item to open the Jobs Templates library to make a
selection.
2. Double-click on the symbol representing the type of job template you want to add to your MBD
installation. In our example here, double-click on the “Trough” symbol to open the Jobs templates library
to make a selection.
3. Drag and drop the job template symbol anywhere on the installation surface which is located on the left of
the “Installation drag & drop toolbox” to open the Jobs template library to make a selection.

14 – The Multiple Duct Banks Module  237


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

When inserting a job template from the library, do not create a direct link with it but make a copy of all layers
part of the template into your MDB installation. Thus, any future changes to that template in the library will not
alter the existing MDB installations already using it.

238  14 – The Multiple Duct Banks Module


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

14 – The Multiple Duct Banks Module  239


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

15 – The Cables in Tunnels


Module
In this chapter we describe the applicability, scopes, limitations, theory and usage of the CYMCAP Cables in
Tunnels add-on module that thermally rates cables installed in tunnels.

Introduction
The Cables in Tunnels module is an optional add-on to CYMCAP that allows the user to determine the
temperature, steady state, cyclic and transient ampacity of cables installed in unventilated tunnels, as well as
the temperature and steady state ampacity of cables installed in ventilated tunnels.

Note: Only identical cables with equal loading are supported in this module.

For unventilated tunnels, this add-on module supports a large variety of cable arrangements for single-core
(flat formations of trefoils) and three-core cables. The cables can be laid down on a floor, hanging from
supports clamped on a wall, installed in ladder racks or in cable trays.
For ventilated tunnels, the cable arrangements are limited to single-core cable, three-core cable, three single-
core cables in flat formation or three single-core cables in trefoil formation. For ventilated tunnels, there is no
distinction between the different types of supports used for the cables.

Summary of module features


 Both unventilated and ventilated tunnels are modeled.
 The modeling capability of a large variety of installation methods in an unventilated tunnel: laying on a
floor; hanging from a wall; in ladder-type racks; or in cable trays.
 Cables and groups of cables can be single-core or three-core. Single-core cables can be arranged in flat
formations (vertically or horizontally) or in trefoil.
 Computation of the steady state ampacity or temperature.
 Consideration of cyclic loading using daily, weekly and yearly load factors for unventilated tunnels.
 Computation of emergency ratings for unventilated tunnels.

Basic Operation
For unventilated tunnels, it is necessary to specify the cable configuration of the installation. Therefore, in
addition to the regular procedure needed to perform a simulation, the user is required to make a selection
from one of the supported cases by clicking on specific figures. These are classified as:
 Single-core cables

15 – The Cables in Tunnels Module  241


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

 Trefoils
 Three-core cables

In addition to the selection of the figure that represents the installation, it is also equired to specify the number
of trays/racks and the number of circuits in one plane.
No such additional procedure is required for ventilated tunnels.

Theoretical Background
Unventilated Tunnels
Since cables in a tunnel are normally placed in groups, and the existing models in CYMCAP consider various
groups of the same cable type, only one cable type and loading are supported per installation. The grouping
reduction factors are those specified in Table 18.23 and 18.24 of the book : L. Heinhold, Power Cables and
their Applications, Siemens, 1990.
It should be pointed out that for deeply buried tunnels the steady state conditions may be reached in several
years. Therefore, CYMCAP accounts for the cyclic variations of the loads by considering daily, weekly and
yearly loss factors to properly adjust the external thermal resistance. This approach, described in the book:
G.J. Anders, Rating of Electric Power Cables in Unfavorable Thermal Environment, John Wiley and Sons and
IEEE Press, 2005. In simplified terms, the user needs to enter a daily load factor (LFD), a weekly load factor
(LFW) and a yearly load factor (LFY). CYMCAP will use the variable ALOS in the specific installation data to
compute the corresponding loss factors as follows:

( )( )
( )( )
( )( )

ALOS is set to 0.3 by default in CYMCAP and the three load factors are set to 1.0, which means full
continuous load.

Note: The yearly, weekly and daily load variations have an effect on the external thermal
resistance only if the tunnel is deep enough. The program makes appropriate checks. If
the tunnel is not deep enough to consider any of these variations, the external thermal
resistance of the earth around the tunnel is only considered. However, the daily loss
factor is taken into account in the calculation of the thermal resistance of air in the tunnel.

The transient analysis of the cables in tunnels is performed in an identical manner to the standard analysis of
buried cables with the following provisions:
 The rectangular tunnel is replaced by a round tunnel with an equivalent radius computed in a similar
fashion as for backfills.

242  15 – The Cables in Tunnels Module


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

 The external thermal resistance of the cables is composed of two parts: (1) The thermal resistance of the
air inside the tunnel; and (2) The thermal resistance of the earth outside the tunnel walls.
 It is assumed that the tunnel walls have the same thermal resistivity as the surrounding soil, which is a
standard assumption for these types of computations and is slightly conservative.
 The external thermal resistance of the air is computed for the average air temperature during the load
cycle.

Ventilated Tunnels
The ventilated tunnel module is based on the CDV version of the IEC standard 60287-2-3©, 1st ed. The model
used in this standard is sufficiently different from the model used in the other modules of CYMCAP to limit the
application of certain features such as the load loss factors and the transient calculations. More importantly,
the coefficients used in the unventilated tunnel option to allow a large number of configurations cannot be
used in the ventilated tunnel option. Hence, the ventilated tunnel option is more limited than the unventilated
option.

Creating a Study for Cables in Tunnels

Unventilated Tunnels
Creating a New Study
In this section, an example consisting of two-trefoil cables installed in a 20 m deep tunnel is shown step-by-
step.
Open the Navigator to access the Study window. Click the New Study button to create a new installation. To
start from scratch, answer No to the question.

15 – The Cables in Tunnels Module  243


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Enter the Study ID, Study title and Execution title to identify the execution.

Click OK to continue. The Solution Option dialog box will come up. For this example, select Equally loaded
(if not already selected) and click OK.

Click on the Cables in Tunnels icon in the Execution bar to start building a Cables in Tunnels
installation.

244  15 – The Cables in Tunnels Module


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

As with the other types of installations, CYMCAP will ask you to indicate the Ambient temperature and the
Native soil thermal resistivity. For this example, the default values will be accepted. It is now necessary to
enter the position and dimensions of the tunnel. For this example we have selected a tunnel that is 5 m high,
4 m wide and 20 m deep to the top of the tunnel.

After clicking on OK the following window will open:

15 – The Cables in Tunnels Module  245


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Now, select the type of cable arrangement. For this example we select “Trefoil cables”, supported “On cable
trays” separated 2d (middle icon in the following figure).

We continue the example by installing one tray and two trefoils:

Click on the Edit button to edit the tray and install it on the right-hand side of the tunnel at one meter from the
floor (Reference coordinate). Click Apply and then Close the window; see images below.

246  15 – The Cables in Tunnels Module


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Select the cables as with any other installation, but make sure to enter a distance to the wall and a distance
between the trefoils.

15 – The Cables in Tunnels Module  247


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

The installation screen now looks as follows:

Complete the installation by entering the specific installation data . Then you can save and run

. The results can be viewed in the same manner as for the other installations. As usual for CYMCAP,
the hottest cable(s) will be highlighted with a red box.

248  15 – The Cables in Tunnels Module


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Adding more trays and circuits to an execution

To make changes or additions to a Cables in Tunnel installation, click on to open the Tunnel installation
data screen. In the following example, click on the Add button and select two new trays.

15 – The Cables in Tunnels Module  249


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

You can select (highlight) the two trays simultaneously and click the Edit button. Then enter the information
on the location of the new trays. In the example we have set one extra tray 2.5 over the tunnel floor and
another one at 1m, both on the left-hand side (see next figures).

Click Apply and Close. Now you are ready to ADD cables by invoking the Installation Data Screen with:

Add four cables. You will note than all cables must be identical. Selecting a different cable than the previously
entered will substitute all cables with the new one.
To install the cables into a particular tray the user needs first to select (highlight) the cables and the click Edit.
Next, select the appropriate tray from the drop down list. In our example, two of the new four cables are
selected. It is also necessary to enter the distance from the edge of the tunnel to the first cable. The
procedure to add the first two new cables to the top tray is illustrated in the following figures.

250  15 – The Cables in Tunnels Module


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

The installation should now look as shown in the figure below.

Repeating the procedure to set the two remaining cables into the lower left tray we have.

15 – The Cables in Tunnels Module  251


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Permutable Trefoils
For cables in unventilated tunnels, it is possible to enter trefoils that can be permuted. The standard
configuration for a trefoil is shown in the following figure.

When installing several circuits in the same tunnel a phase permutation is frequently used. For example, the
user may need to set cables as:

In CYMCAP this is possible only when the appropriate configuration is selected from the Installation Setup
screen (see figure below).

After selecting the cable the bottom cables can be permuted as follows.

252  15 – The Cables in Tunnels Module


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Other permutations can be performed using the CYMCAP tools of the Installation Data screen. Select a
permutable trefoil in the list and then right-click to access the pop-up menu in order to change the circuit
number and phasing.

Ventilated Tunnel to Unventilated Tunnel Conversion


This section describes the steps and considerations required to create a study for an unventilated tunnel from
a study for a ventilated tunnel. Note that the cable type and the cable positions are not saved by CYMCAP in
this process, so it will be necessary to reenter this information again.
Open the ventilated tunnel execution from which the unventilated tunnel version will be made.
Open the Cables in tunnel installation window by clicking on the tunnel drawing in the installation screen and
disable the Ventilated tunnel checkbox.

15 – The Cables in Tunnels Module  253


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Open the Tunnel installation data screen by clicking on to specify the type of supports the cables will be
installed on. Add a new support by selecting Setup new on the Tunnel installation data screen.

254  15 – The Cables in Tunnels Module


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Select the configuration corresponding to your installation on the Cables in tunnel configuration selection
screen and press OK.
The Installation setup for cables in tunnel screen will open. Indicate the appropriate number of supports on
this screen.
Following this, the Installation Setup screen will open. This window can be closed with the Cancel button if no
other cables than those already placed in the ventilated version of the tunnel are required.
Select the support(s) added in the tunnel installation data screen and edit their parameters with the Edit…
button

15 – The Cables in Tunnels Module  255


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

If applicable, choose on which side the support is attached and enter the Y position of the support. Note that
the position of the support corresponds to the bottom of the cables laid on it. Therefore, it should be half a
cable diameter lower than the Y position of the center of the cables that was entered in the ventilated tunnel
installation. Press Apply to confirm the new values.

Open the Installation data screen by pressing . Select the cables and press Edit…

256  15 – The Cables in Tunnels Module


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Reselect the cable type in the Cable Library screen, select on which support to install the cables (if more than
one support have been added), enter the distance between the cables and the tunnel wall, enter the spacing
between the cables and press Ok.

15 – The Cables in Tunnels Module  257


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

A dialog box will open and ask to reload the cable from memory. Press Yes to reuse the specific installation
data (such as sheath bonding) that was previously used in ventilated mode.

The study is now ready and can be saved under a new name to keep both the ventilated and unventilated
versions of the cables in tunnel installation. To do so, access File > Save Execution As > New Execution…

258  15 – The Cables in Tunnels Module


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

The study can now be solved using .

Ventilated Tunnels
Creating a Study from Scratch
In this section, an example consisting of three cables in trefoil configuration installed in a 20 m deep tunnel is
shown step-by-step.
Open the Navigator to access the Study window. Click the New Study button to create a new installation. To
start from scratch, answer No to the question.

15 – The Cables in Tunnels Module  259


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Enter the Study ID, Study title and Execution title to identify the execution.

Click OK to continue. The Solution Option dialog box will appear. For this example, select Equally loaded
(if not already selected) and click OK.

Click on the Cables in Tunnels icon in the Execution bar to start building a Cables in Tunnels
installation.

260  15 – The Cables in Tunnels Module


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

As with the other types of installations, CYMCAP will ask you to indicate the Ambient temperature and the
Native soil thermal resistivity. It is also necessary to enter the additional parameters of the tunnel.

The Ventilated tunnel checkbox indicates if the tunnel is ventilated or not. When the checkbox is disabled,
the parameters dedicated to ventilated tunnels are greyed out.
The Tunnel length represents the distance the air will flow between the inlet and the outlet. If the tunnel has
several inlets and outlets that are arranged in such a way that the air is completely refreshed between them,
then, the length used can be the distance between an inlet and an outlet rather than the length of the whole
tunnel.

15 – The Cables in Tunnels Module  261


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

For this example, the following parameters have been used:

262  15 – The Cables in Tunnels Module


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

After clicking on OK, the following window will open:

Only one circuit can be added to the tunnel. In this example, a trefoil is used.
Edit the cable’s installation data by selecting it in the Installation data screen and pressing Edit…

Choose the cable type and enter its coordinates in the Cable Library screen. Press Ok to confirm the
parameters.

15 – The Cables in Tunnels Module  263


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

264  15 – The Cables in Tunnels Module


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

The installation screen now looks as follows:

Complete the installation by entering the specific installation data . Then you can save and run

the simulation . The results can be viewed in the same manner as for the other installations. A tunnel
temperature profile, which is exclusive to ventilated tunnels, can be viewed with the Ventilated tunnel report
button located below the installation screen.

The default temperatures shown on the graph are those of the hottest cable of the installation. The various
options, such as the shown curves, can be changed with the drop-down menu and the radio button at the top
of the graph.

15 – The Cables in Tunnels Module  265


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Unventilated Tunnel to Ventilated Tunnel Conversion


This section describes the steps required to create a study for a ventilated tunnel from a study for an
unventilated tunnel.
Note that the ventilated option is restricted to few basics cable configurations which are:
 A single-core cable;
 Three single-core cables in flat formation;
 Three single-core cables in trefoil formation;
 A three-core cable.
Since the unventilated option allows more configurations than the ventilated option, it is possible that the
conversion results in an unsupported configuration. In such case, an error message will be given while solving
the study.
Open the unventilated tunnel execution from which the ventilated tunnel version will be made.
Open the Cables in tunnel installation window by clicking on the tunnel drawing in the installation screen and
enable the Ventilated tunnel checkbox. Enter the required parameters and press Ok to confirm the changes.

The study is now ready and can be saved under a new name to keep both the ventilated and unventilated
versions of the cables in tunnel installation. To do so, access File > Save Execution As > New Execution…

266  15 – The Cables in Tunnels Module


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

The study can now be solved by clicking on the button.

Tunnel Shape Display


The tunnel shape can be rectangular or circular for a ventilated tunnel. However, it can only be rectangular for
an unventilated tunnel.
For unventilated tunnels, the numerical algorithms for modeling cables in tunnels assume that the tunnel
under study is rectangular in shape for steady state and cyclic calculations. In transient calculations, an
equivalent circular tunnel is computed from the rectangular one.
For aesthetics purposes, CYMCAP only allows the user to add a rounded top to a rectangular tunnel or a
circular shape around it.
From the Cables in Tunnels Installation dialog box, scroll down and select either a “Rectangular tunnel
inside a circular shape” or “Rectangular tunnel rounded on top”. See the next figures.

15 – The Cables in Tunnels Module  267


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Our examples look like this:

Do not forget that is only for aesthetical purposes. A rectangular tunnel model is still considered to be of
rectangular shape in the calculations even with the aesthetics parameters enabled.

Validation
The example for the rating of cables in tunnels presented in the book: L. Heinhold, Power Cables and their
Applications, Siemens, 1990, is used for comparison purposes.
In an unventilated tunnel with dimensions 2.2 m x 1.5 m the cables shown in the table below are to be
installed and be loaded with the currents given in Table 1 – Numerical values for the verification example,
shown below. The duration of the operation is planned for 8 hours full load per day. The ambient air

268  15 – The Cables in Tunnels Module


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

temperature is 35C and the soil temperature at the depth equivalent to the tunnel center, with cables
unloaded is 25C. The soil thermal resistivity is 1.0 K.m/W. The arrangement of cables is shown in the figure
below, with cables placed on racks. All cables in the example are 3-core and are separated one diameter
apart on the cable trays. The input parameters for the comparison are the total losses of the cable system
(Table 1) and the cable arrangement in the tunnel.

Arrangement for cables in a tunnel

The output values to be compared are:


 The reduction factor due to grouping of cables in the tunnel,
 The temperature of the air in the tunnel
 The resulting reduction factor
Since these are the only parameters that differ in the rating calculation of cables in tunnel and in air, once we
establish that they are computed correctly, the ratings from both methods of calculations will be the same.

15 – The Cables in Tunnels Module  269


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Table 1 - Numerical values for the verification example

The computed values in both cases are summarized in Table 2 below. We can observe a very good
agreement with the results obtained by Heinhold.

Tunnel_T4 Reduction factor Reduction factor Ambient air


[k/W] Temperature [C]
Heinhold 0.094 0.87 0.79 45
CYMCAP 0.094 0.87 0.783 45.5
Table 2 - Comparison of results

270  15 – The Cables in Tunnels Module


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

16 – The Cables in Troughs


Module
In this chapter we describe the applicability, scopes, limitations, theory and usage of the CYMCAP Cables in
Troughs add-on module used to thermally rate cables installed in filled and unfilled troughs.

Introduction
The Cables in Troughs Module is an optional add-on to CYMCAP that allows the user to determine the
thermal rating of cables installed in filled and unfilled troughs. For filled troughs it is possible to compute the
temperature and steady state unequally loaded ampacity. Cyclic loading is considered through the use of load
factors. For unfilled and unventilated troughs, the module can compute the equally loaded ampacity or
temperature when the cables are equally loaded and no load factors are permitted.
A trough (or a trench) is understood in this module as a long shallow rectangular-shaped excavation, where
the walls, bottom and cover are made of concrete. The cables can be installed on the floor, hanging from
supports on the walls or racks. The trough can be filled with a thermally good material or left unfilled (air
filled). The heat transfer mechanism is different between the two possibilities and therefore they are treated
independently.
It is important to note that an unfilled trough is different from a tunnel in the sense that tunnels have very large
inertia in the soil surrounding them. This is not the case for a trough that has a relatively thin cover. In troughs
there is virtually no inertia and the temperature changes in the cables following almost instantaneously the
changes in current.
There are also differences between a filled trough installation and a backfill installation. The standard
methodologies to compute the ampacity for cables installed in backfills do not apply to cables installed in
troughs. This is even more so when the lid is flush with (or close) to the surface due to the assumptions in the
standard methods.

Theoretical background for filled troughs


Filled troughs are treated in CYMCAP as multiple backfills. Thus, the solution is obtained by computing the
external-to-the-cable thermal resistance T4 using the finite elements method. All users having the MDB
module installed have direct access to model cables in filled troughs. This facility allows them to build a
trough installation very quickly. The following figures show an example of cables installed in filled troughs
together with the finite elements grid for its modeling.
Adiabatic boundaries are set sufficiently far away on both sides and the bottom of the installation (boundaries
not shown in the figure). Experience has shown that these boundary conditions result in a negligible error
when computing cable temperature. The soil surface can be represented as an isothermal or a convective
boundary.

16 – The Cables in Troughs Module  271


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Once T4 is known, ampacity calculations can be efficiently performed with the standardized procedures. This
is an important difference with respect to an approach using only the finite element method for the
computation of the thermal fields. In the latter case, much longer simulation times can be expected.

272  16 – The Cables in Troughs Module


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Theoretical background for unfilled troughs


Unfilled troughs are treated according with the IEC Standard 60287-2-1. This standard gives a formula to
compute the temperature inside the trough:

where:
T = Temperature rise of air in the trough (C) above
ambient
WTOT = The total power dissipated in the trough (W/m)
p= Is the part of the trough perimeter which is effective
for heat dissipation (m). Any portion of the
perimeter, which is exposed to sunlight, is not
included in the value of p.

The rating of a particular cable in the trough is calculated as for a cable in free air, but the ambient
temperature for the simulation shall be increased by T.
The standard (IEC 60287-2-1) clearly states: The validity of this formula is at present under
investigation.

Basic Use
The module for Cables in Troughs is invoked by clicking on the following icon from the list of installations.

In a similar fashion to other installation types, this facility in CYMCAP is very intuitive. Experienced users of
CYMCAP will find it easy to use without much explanation.

16 – The Cables in Troughs Module  273


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Creating a Study for Cables in Filled Troughs


In this section, an example consisting of two-trefoil cables installed in a filled trough flush with the earth
surface is shown step-by-step.
Open the Navigator to access the Study window. Click on the New Study button to create a new installation.
To start from scratch, answer No to the question.

Enter the Study ID, Study title and Execution title to identify the execution.

Click OK to continue. The Solution Option dialog box will come up. For this example, select Unequally
loaded and click OK. Select the Cables in Troughs installation type from the expanded list.

274  16 – The Cables in Troughs Module


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

The first step is to select the filling material of the trough as shown in the following figure. This serves to
establish whether the trough is filled or unfilled. For this example we pick Sand (type 2).

The textures can be changed without affecting the values of thermal resistivity. Only the selection Unfilled
(Air) creates a different case (more on this below). The next step is to enter the width and height of the Inside
filling material and the frame that contains the filling (see figures below).

16 – The Cables in Troughs Module  275


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

The trough will be placed centered with respect to the coordinate x and the cover will be flush with the surface
(y = 0). The distances between the sides will be symmetric left-right and top-bottom. Do not forget to enter
the other data required in this screen: the ambient temperature and the thermal resistivities of all materials
involved. The following figure shows the trough built in this example.

The next step is to add the cables. This is done exactly as for cables in backfills and non-standard duct banks
by entering the x,y coordinates of each cable. Coordinates can be entered for groups of cables arranged in a
matrix (see next figure).

276  16 – The Cables in Troughs Module


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

The last step is to enter the specific installation data. For cables in troughs it is possible to enter ducts.

As with all buried cases CYMCAP can toggle between the labels and the approximate distribution of the
thermal fields by clicking on Ctrl-t.

16 – The Cables in Troughs Module  277


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Moving the trough down


After the Width and Height of the Inside and Frame have been entered it is possible to move a trough down
by adding to the Depth an equal amount. In the example we add a foot of soil on top. The procedure and
results are shown in the following figures. The same principles apply to move the trough left or right, but now
we operate on the figures automatically set on Left.

278  16 – The Cables in Troughs Module


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Asymmetrical troughs
The user can easily modify the default values when a trough is asymmetric. Let us take the previous example
and subtract 0.3 foot from the Left and Depth to produce the asymmetrical trough of the figure below.

16 – The Cables in Troughs Module  279


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

The sides and bottom of the external Frame can be extended and shorten to produce a wide gamut of
asymmetrical troughs. After a few experiments the users should be able to produce any asymmetrical
rectangular trough.

Creating a Study for Cables in Unfilled Troughs


In this second example we will show how to install two trefoils in an unfilled trough flush with the earth
surface. Please note that for CYMCAP all unfilled troughs are assumed to be flush with the surface.
Create a new study entering appropriate titles for study /execution and select the Equally Loaded solution.
Then click on the Cables in Troughs icon:

Select UnFilled (Air) as the Texture of the inside. This is the flag to tell CYMCAP to use the IEC standards for
the rating for this installation.

Let us now enter the dimensions as shown in the following figure. Please note that the Cover thickness of the
frame cannot be changed from zero. Select ‘Anders-Coates’ as the shallow through method. The unfilled
trough is shown below.

280  16 – The Cables in Troughs Module


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

For Anders-Coates method: enter native soil thermal resistivity, thermal resistivity of the cover and wind
velocity as it shown below. For other method selection some of these values won’t be available.

16 – The Cables in Troughs Module  281


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

It is now necessary to select an installation type from the list of Cables in Air and Group Cables (IEC 60287-2-
2). For this Example, we select installation number 9 from the Group Cables list and place the two cables
inside the trough as shown below. The installation can be completed with the specific installation data and we
are ready to run.

282  16 – The Cables in Troughs Module


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Note: The thickness of the trough structure is displayed only for aesthetics purposes. It is not
used in the calculation as per IEC 60287. Refer to Section Theoretical background for
unfilled troughs.

16 – The Cables in Troughs Module  283


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

After performing the simulation, CYMCAP will display the current and temperature of the conductors as
customary, but it will also display the average temperature of the air inside the trough.

284  16 – The Cables in Troughs Module


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

17 – The Multiple Casings Module

Introduction
The multiple casings module (MCAS) is an optional add-on to CYMCAP that allows the user to determine the
thermal rating of cables installed in one or more casings in parallel in the same installation. It is possible to
compute the temperature and/or steady state unequally loaded ampacity of cables in casing(s).
A casing is understood in CYMCAP as a large non-magnetic conduit filled with air, inside which both cables in
ducts and cables not in ducts can be installed. Actually, the module includes the facility to:
 Install all cables of a given casing inside nonmagnetic ducts inside the larger casing.
 Install all cables directly inside the large nonmagnetic casing (no ducts would be considered inside the
casing).
 Install some of the circuits inside the ducts enclosed in the large casing and the remaining circuits outside
the ducts, directly inside the larger casing.
A casing can be immersed in water, placed on the sea bed or buried underground. No filling material is
considered in the casing(s) or in the duct(s) other than air. Both casings and ducts inside casings can contain
several circuits and different cable types. The circuits can have multiple cables per phase.
Several materials are available to model both ducts and casings, including non-magnetic metallic materials,
PVC, Polyethylene, Earthenware, etc…

Note:  There are no limits imposed on the size of the conduits, however coefficients used in
the computations are coming from IEC 60287 which have been tested for usual duct
dimensions and not for very large ducts. However, there is no other published research
available in this area.

Summary of features
 Different burial environments are allowed: water or underground.
 Modeling of any number of casings in the same installation.
 Modeling of any number of ducts inside one or more casings at the same time.
 Modeling any number of circuits inside a casing.
 Modeling any number of circuits inside a duct.
 Circuits in ducts and in casings can be multiple cables per phase.
 Several materials are available to model ducts and casings, including non-magnetic metallic materials.
 Size of ducts and casings are not limited.

17 – The Multiple Casings Module  285


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Limitations
 Magnetic casings or magnetic ducts are not supported.
 Coefficients used for ducts and casings are from IEC 60287. They were tested for usual duct dimensions
and not very large ducts. There is no other published research available in this area.
 In principle, many circuits per duct can be modeled. However, be aware that putting a large number of
cables per duct should be looked at very carefully because of mutual heating effect. This may result in
very low admissible current.

Creating a Multiple Casing installation


In this section an example of the multiple casing module in operation is illustrated. The installation has two
casings aligned in parallel where the distance center to center is 2 meters. The casings are laid on the sea
bed.
On the next pages, step-by-step instructions are showing how to create this type of installation.

286  17 – The Multiple Casings Module


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Creating a multiple casing study


Open the Navigator to access the Study library tab. Click the New Study button to create a new installation.
To start from scratch, answer No to the question.

Enter the Study ID, Study title and Execution title to identify the execution.

Click OK to continue. The Solution Option dialog box will be displayed. For this example, select the
Unequally loaded option and click OK.

17 – The Multiple Casings Module  287


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Select the Multiple Casings icon in the Execution bar to start building a multiple casing installation.
This is the same button as for the multiple ductbanks/backfills.

The Installation setup dialog box that is displayed next allows you to define how many casings and ducts are
used in the installation. Select the type of installation you want to use by choosing “Create a multiple Casings
installation”. Change the installation type by choosing “Under Water” and “Cables on the sea bed”. For this
example, type 2 for non-standard casing(s) and 6 for duct(s).

Once this is done, click OK to continue.


CYMCAP will ask you to indicate the Ambient temperature and the Thermal resistivity of silt. For this
example, the Ambient Temperature is the water temperature. Enter 7 degree for the ambient temperature.
Keep the default value for the thermal resistivity of silt. Enter 0.74 as the depth of the sea bed. Click OK to
continue.

288  17 – The Multiple Casings Module


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

The depth of the sea bed is the distance indicated in red in the picture below.

Please note that if you don’t enter any value for the depth of the sea bed, it will be left zero by default. Zero
will be understood as the distance from the water-sea bed interface to the top of the less deep casing (i.e. the
closest casing to the silt surface). In the case the user doesn’t want the less deep casing to be flush with the
surface but wants more silt on top of the casing, he needs to enter the appropriate value for the depth of the
sea bed as explained above.

Note: It is not possible to have part of the casing in water and another part of the casing buried
in silt. Actually, for a casing buried in sea bed installation, the whole casing should be
completely buried in silt.

The next Installation setup dialog box will allow defining how many circuits are used in the installation. Enter
2 three-phase circuit and click on OK to continue.

17 – The Multiple Casings Module  289


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Installing casings
In the multiple casings mode, it is important to understand that cables cannot be installed until at least one
casing has been built. All cables need to be installed inside the casings directly or inside the ducts that are
going to be in the casings.

By clicking on the Multiple Casings Installation Data icon in the Execution bar, the list of casings and
ducts in the installation is displayed.

290  17 – The Multiple Casings Module


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

The tabs on the left side of the screen allow you to switch quickly between the casings/ducts list and the
cables list.

The Multiple casings installation window, on the left of the screen, allows entering the information on the
casings and the ducts. Casings and ducts that are just created are identified as “layers”. In this example,
there are eight undefined layers that are shown on the left side of the installation window.
The layer types available are:

NCAS Non-standard casing. Dimensions are entered manually.


NDUC Duct to install inside casing. Dimensions are entered manually.

One or more layers can be selected at the same time from the list. When one item only is selected, CYMCAP
allows to Edit, to Delete or to set the installation of the layer by pressing the respective button “Casing
Installation” or “Duct Installation” according to the layer type. When more than one item is selected, CYMCAP
will only allow to Delete the group of layers.
At any time the user can add new casings or ducts to the existing ones by pressing Add. Finally, it is possible
to restart from a completely new installation by clicking on Setup new.
For this example, select the first item on the list and click the Casing Installation button.
The casing selector form will appear. The current layer to be installed is a non-standard casing.
In the example, change the X Center position of the casing to (–1.0) and Y Center position of the casing to
(1.0). Enter 500.0 mm for the inside diameter of the casing and 520.0 mm for the outside diameter of the
casing. Select the item PVC casing in water for the casing construction. Click the Next casing button to install
the second casing. All casings can be installed at the same time before clicking the Apply button.

17 – The Multiple Casings Module  291


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

At first one will notice that the second casing overlaps the first one. Move the X Centre position to 1.0. The
casing colored in yellow is the current selection that we are working on.

Once this is done, click Apply to confirm that all the work for the casings is done.
The first two layers of the list have been installed properly as two non-standard casings. Let us now define the
six other ducts layers.

292  17 – The Multiple Casings Module


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Installing ducts
For our example, select the first layer identified by <none> from the list and click on the Duct Installation
button.

17 – The Multiple Casings Module  293


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

The Duct selector form will appear. The current layer to be installed is a duct. Note that there is no duct
library. Change the X Centre position of the duct to (–1.0) and Y Centre position of the duct to (1.2). Select 4
in. for the American standard nominal duct size. Select the item PVC duct in air for the duct construction and
attach the duct to the first casing NSTD CAS1. Click on the Next duct button to install the second duct. All
ducts can be installed at the same time before clicking the “Apply” button.

For the second duct, change the X Centre position to (–1.15) and Y Centre position to (1.12). Click on the
Next duct button. For the third duct, enter (–0.85) for the X Centre position, and (1.12) for the Y Centre
position, etc…
For the three other ducts the positions will be (1.0, 1.2), (0.85, 1.12) and (1.15, 1.12). Don’t forget to attach
those ducts to the second casing NSTD CAS2.

294  17 – The Multiple Casings Module


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Once this is done, click Apply to confirm that all the work for the ducts is done.

Installation of cables
Before installing any cables, the user needs to tell CYMCAP in which layer (casing or duct) the selected
cables will be installed. To select layer(s) from the installation:
 Select one layer - Press and hold the “Shift” key and click to select the layer of interest.
 Select many layers - Press and hold the “Ctrl” key while you click consecutively on all the layers of
interest. Clicking again on a selected layer will unselect it.
For our example, select the duct located in the center of the casing on the left-hand side. The selected duct
will be highlighted in yellow.

Click on the Installation data button in the Execution bar. Select the first cable of circuit no. 1 from the
list of cables on the left-hand side of the screen. Click Edit button to make a cable selection from the cable
library.

17 – The Multiple Casings Module  295


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

The cable library will pop up with all the available single core cables. The first cable is already selected by
default. Select the cable ID (13) from the list. Enter X position at –1.0 and Y position at 1.225 and click the OK
button.

296  17 – The Multiple Casings Module


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

As you see, the first cable is installed into the first duct of the casing on the left hand-side. The next step is to
install the last two cables of that casing. Before editing the cables, select the second duct on the left by using
the same procedure explained previously (press and hold "Shift" and click on the duct).
Once the second duct is selected, select the second cable from the list and click the Edit button.

Enter X position at –1.15 and Y position at 1.14 and click the OK button.

17 – The Multiple Casings Module  297


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Select the third duct on the left by using the same procedure explained previously (press and hold "Shift" and
click on the duct).
Once the third duct is selected, select the third cable from the list and click the Edit button.

Enter X position at –0.85 and Y position at 1.14 and click the OK button.

298  17 – The Multiple Casings Module


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Repeat the same procedure to complete the second casing with the last three cables that are not installed
yet. Press and hold "Shift" and click on the center duct of the second casing on the right hand-side and
complete the installation. Here is the final look of the installation.

17 – The Multiple Casings Module  299


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Complete the specific installation data


The next step is to complete the specific installation data for the only type of cable used in the installation. To
do so, just click on the Specific Installation Data icon in the Execution bar.
Below is the screen to enter the specific installation data of cables. For this cable, under section
Sheath/Shield Bonding, select item Single point bonded, triangular configuration. Once this is done, click
OK to accept.

Save and start the simulation


Before starting the simulation, make sure you save the execution by clicking on the save icon at the bottom
left corner of the application:

300  17 – The Multiple Casings Module


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

In the following pop-up window select Save as is and then on OK.

Solve the simulation by clicking on the Solver icon in the Execution bar. Once the computations are
finished you will access the Steady-State Report by clicking on the corresponding button at the bottom left of
the installation window, or you can choose to access the report in Excel format by clicking on the Excel
Report button at the bottom center.
Congratulations! The example has been completed successfully. Close the execution and make sure to save
if you have not done it already.
Back to the navigator with the new study just created.

17 – The Multiple Casings Module  301


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

18 – The Duct Bank Optimizer


Module

Introduction
The CYMCAP/OPT Duct Bank Optimizer is an optional add-on module that allows the user to determine the
placement of several circuits within a duct bank so that certain optimal criteria are fulfilled. More specifically,
the module can recommend the various circuit dispositions within the duct bank in order that:
 The duct bank overall ampacity, i.e. the sum of the ampacities for all circuits, is maximized.
 The duct bank overall ampacity, i.e. the sum of the ampacities for all circuits, is minimized.
 The ampacity of any given circuit is maximized.
 The ampacity of any given circuit is minimized.
The module rests on enumeration techniques and is based on exhaustive serial simulation of all valid
combinations of cable locations. That is why execution times can be large depending on the size of the duct
bank and on the number of circuits.
The module permits the user to either fix the location of one or more circuits to predetermined positions, or to
designate allowed positioning for one or more circuits.

18 – The Duct Bank Optimizer Module  303


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

An illustrative example of the Duct Bank Optimizer


In what follows, an example of the duct bank optimizer module in operation is illustrated. The duct bank will be
a 3x3 duct bank. It is desired that 2 triplexed formations be placed in such a way so that the total overall
ampacity is minimized.

Invoking the Optimizer


The execution is built as if the 2 triplexed formations were to have determined positions and instead of
permuting the cables to the desired locations. The duct bank optimizer is invoked by clicking the Optimizer
button.

The graphical display will change to the following:

304  18 – The Duct Bank Optimizer Module


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Configuring the Optimizer


The Optimizer needs to be configured first, i.e. to designate the preferred cable positions for every circuit.
Click the Configure Optimizer button, to access these operations. The Installation data dialog box will be
replaced with the Configure Optimizer dialog box. It can be seen that only the first circuit is highlighted
below and, by default, all conduit positions are available.

In the case where a fixed position is desired for the highlighted circuit, the selection Fixed position must be
selected and then the specific conduit must be shown to the application by right clicking and dragging the
circuit to that conduit. A similar procedure is followed when a set allowed positions is designated for any
circuit. The screen below illustrates the allowed positions for circuit #2, should we have chosen them to be so.

Once this is done, click the Apply button. This will hide the Configure optimizer dialog.

18 – The Duct Bank Optimizer Module  305


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Running the Optimizer


After configuring the Optimizer, click the Run Ductbank Optimizer button and the following dialog box will
allow the selection of the optimization criterion.

Since minimization of the overall duct bank ampacity is desired, we select the first option. Click Go to launch
the Optimizer.

Upon termination, the enumerator statistics are shown for completeness. Click Close to view the results.

306  18 – The Duct Bank Optimizer Module


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Viewing the results of the Optimizer

It is seen that the various combinations are presented in ascending ampacity order with the minimum
ampacity being the first.

18 – The Duct Bank Optimizer Module  307


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Notes:  The drop down list of the ampacities is context-sensitive and whenever a new entry
is selected the new circuit positioning is automatically shown on the graph.
 All circuit positions can be scanned using the Previous and the Next buttons.
 Clicking Apply, will import the given circuit layout into the main installation.

308  18 – The Duct Bank Optimizer Module


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

19 – The Short Circuit Cable


Rating Module

Introduction
CYMCAP/SCR is the Short Circuit Cable Rating (SCR) optional add-on module dedicated to the calculation of
the adiabatic and non-adiabatic short-circuit ratings. The adiabatic (inertial) calculation applies for the typical
short time duration short-circuit currents. The non-adiabatic calculations, which increases the ampacity rating
by considering heat flow, apply only to short-circuit currents lasting very long time. The method implemented
is described in the IEC Standard 60949 "Calculation of thermally permissible short-circuit currents, taking into
account non-adiabatic heating effects".
Based on the data entered, CYMCAP /SCR computes the following:
1. The maximum short-circuit current that a cable component can carry given the short circuit time together
with the initial and final temperatures. The equation to compute the maximum short circuit current given
the time and the initial and final temperatures for the adiabatic conditions is:

√ ( )

2. The final temperature that a given cable component will reach for a specified short circuit current and
initial temperature. The final temperature given the short circuit current, the time and the initial
temperature (for the adiabatic) conditions is computed from:

( )
where:
IAD = short-circuit (rms) current [A]
T = time that the short-circuit lasts [s]
2
S = cross sectional area of the metallic component under evaluation [mm ]
f = final temperature [ºC]
i = initial temperature [ºC]
and K,  from the following table:
Layer Material K 
Copper 226 234.5
Conductor
Aluminum 148 228
Lead (and alloys) 41 230
Steel 78 202
Sheath, Screen & Armour
Bronze 180 313
Aluminum 148 228

19 – The Short Circuit Cable Rating Module  309


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Running the SCR module


Click the Short Circuit Solver icon in the Cable design data window to open the Short circuit
calculation dialog box. This window will allow the entry of the calculation parameters for the cable you are
currently working with.

Short circuit rating calculations


CYMCAP/SCR can compute the adiabatic and non-adiabatic short-circuit rating for up to the five metallic
layers possible in the CYMCAP model of a cable, namely:
1. Conductor
2. Sheath
3. Sheath reinforcement
4. Concentric Neutral / Skid Wires
5. Armour
The calculation parameters are:
1. Short-Circuit Current (kA)
2. Final Temperature (C)
3. Initial Temperature (C)
4. Time (s)
The following figure shows the Short-circuit calculation dialog box more closely.

310  19 – The Short Circuit Cable Rating Module


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

When you open the dialog box, the default Final Temperatures are displayed, and no cable layers are
selected for calculation (Calculate check boxes).
You can modify any of the values of the table. To perform the calculations, enable the Calculate check boxes
for the layers. Then, click on the Calculate button to obtain the adiabatic and non-adiabatic short circuit
ratings for the layers selected. The results will be displayed in the bottom part of the window as shown in the
following figure.

19 – The Short Circuit Cable Rating Module  311


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Pipe-type cables parameters


For pipe-type cables, the user needs to complete the data corresponding to the pipe. Click on the Enter pipe
data button to open the dialog box for the pipe data and enter the relevant parameters. Click OK to return to
the Short circuit calculation dialog box.

312  19 – The Short Circuit Cable Rating Module


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Calculating the final temperature


To calculate the final temperature for any layer, enter the short circuit current and click on the Calculate
button. For example, it is possible to compute the short circuit rating for the conductor and simultaneously the
final temperature in the sheath for a given short circuit current; see the following figure.

Saving your parameters


When you click OK in the Short Circuit calculation window, CYMCAP retains the values entered for the
current session only.
If you want to keep the values entered as your preferred settings to be used in your next CYMCAP session,
use the command File > Save (or Save As…) of the Cable design data window. This saves the data entered
in the Cable Library with the cable information. Thus, these new settings will be displayed in the
CYMCAP/SCR window the next time you run it.

19 – The Short Circuit Cable Rating Module  313


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Default short circuit final temperature values


CYMCAP uses the values in the following tables as the default final temperatures. Thus, CYMCAP/SCR is
ready to compute the maximum short-circuit current when the materials specified are on the list. For custom
materials, or materials not on the list, the user needs to enter the values. As explained previously, the user
can specify any value and save it for later use.
Clicking on the Default button will restore the final temperatures to the default for the applicable layers
altogether.

Conductor
Insulation Default Final Temperature
Solid 250 C
LPOF 250 C
HPOF-Self Contained 250 C
HPOF Pipetype 250 C
External Gas 250 C
Internal Gas, Preimpregnated 250 C
Internal Gas, Imnpregnated 250 C
Butyl Rubber 250 C
EPR 250 C
PVC <= 300 mm2 160 C
PVC > 300 mm2 140 C
Polyethylene <= 300 mm2 150 C
Polyethylene > 300 mm2 130 C
XLPE UNF 250 C
XLPE Filled 250 C
PPP 250 C

Sheath, Concentric Neutral, Armour

Beddings – Default Final Temperature


Servings & Jackets AL Lead Other
Compounded Joute 200 C 170 C 200 C
Rubber Sandwich 350 C 170 C 350 C
Polycholoprene 220 C 170 C 220 C
Polyethylene 150 C 150 C 150 C
PVC 160 C 170 C 200 C
EPR 250 C 170 C 250 C
Butyl Rubber 200 C 170 C 200 C
Coal 200 C 170 C 200 C

When the sheath, the concentric neutral, or the armour is touching the insulation, then the lowest temperature
between the two tables is assigned to the metallic layer touching the insulation.

314  19 – The Short Circuit Cable Rating Module


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Cable damage curve calculation


CYMCAP is capable of computing the damage curve of a cable which can then be used in the CYMTCC
application by importing the result file.

Basic operations
In order to produce a cable damage curve, the following steps must be followed.
 Check the “Cable damage curve calculation” check box
 Enter “Minimum time”, “Maximum time” and “Step time” in seconds.
 Check at least the conductor layer for calculation
 Click on the “Calculate” button to compute the cable damage curve

19 – The Short Circuit Cable Rating Module  315


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Cable damage curve results


For the same cable, two different damage curves are computed by CYMCAP: one using adiabatic short circuit
current results and one using non-adiabatic short circuit current results. The user can only display one of both
at a time by enabling the corresponding radio button shown in the figure below. By default, the adiabatic short
circuit current is shown.

316  19 – The Short Circuit Cable Rating Module


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Export cable damage curve to CYMTCC import file


Click on “Export cable damage curve to CYMTCC import file” button as shown below in the figure. Enter the
CSV file name to be used later by the CYMTCC application.

19 – The Short Circuit Cable Rating Module  317


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Import CSV file with CYMTCC application


Basic operations
 Create a new “Miscellaneous” equipment in CYMTCC application
 Check the “Custom points” check box
 Click on the “Enter minimum…” button to open the dialog box
 From the “Minimum Melting” dialog box, click on the “Import” button to import the CSV file
 Browse for the CSV file and click “Open”
 Click on “Save”

318  19 – The Short Circuit Cable Rating Module


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Cable damage curve displayed on time current plot

19 – The Short Circuit Cable Rating Module  319


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

20 – The Magnetic Fields Module


In this chapter the applicability, scopes, limitations and theory behind the CYME Magnetic Fields Calculation
Module is described. Although this module is not directly related to thermal cable rating, it offers convenience
to the users of CYMCAP.

Introduction
The Magnetic Fields Module is an optional add-on that can be connected to CYMCAP. Once an ampacity or a
temperature run has been performed, the module computes the magnetic flux density at any point on or
above the ground for an underground cable installation using the current computed or specified in the steady
state simulation.

Modeling Assumptions
To perform the calculations, the Magnetic Fields Module makes the following assumptions:
1. The length of the cable is much larger than the study area and therefore the infinite-length thin-wire two-
dimensional approach is used.
2. All media is assumed homogenous, isotropic and linear electromagnetically speaking. Therefore, the
principle of superposition applies and the magnetic field produced by each cable individually is added to
obtain the total field.
3. The earth resistivity effects (eddy currents in the earth) are neglected because the penetration depth is in
the order of 225 m to 2,250 m for earth resistivities between 10 and 1000 -m at 50/60 Hz.
4. The region (right of way) where the fields are to be computed is much smaller that the wavelength.
5. The currents in a three-phase circuit can be unbalanced (different magnitude and/or phase).
6. The induced currents in any component in the installation are neglected. This is the induced currents in
cable sheaths, concentric neutrals, screens, armours, neutral wires and induced currents in neighboring
cables and structures are all neglected.
7. No provisions are made to account for field distortions and saturations caused by any magnetic
component at or near the cable installation (above ground or underground). In particular, the development
does not consider armours, pipes, magnetic ducts, etc.

20 – The Magnetic Fields Module  321


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Theoretical Background
The computed 2-D magnetic flux density B is a function of the x, y coordinates of the cables and the location
where the magnetic flux is to be computed. The following expressions are used:

( ) ∑ [ ] [T]
( ) ( )

( ) ∑ [ ]
( ) ( )

Each cable in the installation is treated as an independent source of magnetic field. Thus, a three-phase
circuit is compound of three independent currents, which can be unbalanced (different magnitude and/or
different phase shift of 120). By default the currents will be balanced, but the user can change them.
To account for the fact that the magnetic field varies cyclically with time producing an elliptically polarized
rotating vector, we estimate numerically Bmajor and Bminor as:

[T]
( ) [√ ( ) ( )]

( ) [√ ( ) ( )]

This module uses a resolution of 40 points per cycle in the following equation:

( ) ∑ ( )[ ] [T]
( ) ( )

( ) ∑ ( )[ ]
( ) ( )

Note, however, that only half a cycle needs to be simulated to capture the maximum and minimum values.
Finally the resultant is computed from:

[T]

For the reports [T] are used rather than [T].

322  20 – The Magnetic Fields Module


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Basic Operation
After a steady state ampacity or temperature simulation has been performed with CYMCAP a dialog box will
open when clicking on:

The coordinates and the computed/entered currents are automatically entered. The magnetic flux density
from x = –10 m (-30 ft) to 10m (30 ft) with a resolution of 0.2 m (0.5 ft) at the earth’s surface (y=0) is
automatically displayed; see next figure.

Computing the Magnetic Flux Density


To perform the calculation of the magnetic flux density from inside CYMCAP, it is necessary first to setup and
run a CYMCAP steady state simulation. This implies that all cables have been defined and properly set at
their locations using the CYMCAP graphical user interface.

To invoke the module click on that becomes active only after a successful steady state simulation. As
mentioned above the coordinates and the computed/entered currents for all cables are automatically passed
to the module. The magnetic flux density from –10 m (-30 ft) to 10m (30 ft) with a resolution of 0.2 m (0.5 ft) at
the surface (y=0) will be automatically displayed; see the above figure.
The dialog box displays the x,y location, the current and angle for all cables (assuming positive sequence
excitation) in the installation as shown in the following figure. The user can modify any entry in a white box.
This allows simulating magnitude or angle unbalances in the different circuits. Changing any value produces
instantaneous refreshing of the graph (and tabulated results).

20 – The Magnetic Fields Module  323


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

In the right-most section of the dialog box is the list of height values (y) for which the calculations will be
carried out and the plots will be displayed. By default the y=0 and y=1 are on the list, but only y=0 is selected
(highlighted in blue) and results automatically computed/displayed.

Changing any value produces instantaneously a refresh of the screen; compare the figures above and below.
Note that the maximum value an location of the magnetic flux density is identified.

324  20 – The Magnetic Fields Module


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

To display the curves corresponding to the two y values it is necessary to select the two values; see next
figure.

To display the tabular results click on

20 – The Magnetic Fields Module  325


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Changing the Plotting Parameters


The x-range, resolution and number/location of y values for which the magnetic fields are computed can be
changed. This is useful to zoom into an interest zone. For our example, we enter Xmin=-2.8, Xmax = 1.1 with
a Step of 0.1 to obtain the following figure.

A particular range of y values can be displayed (by adding them to the list). For example consider that all y
values from 0 m to 1 m with a step 0.1 m are to be displayed. They need first to be added to the list with the
arrow and then selected with a click; see the figure below.

326  20 – The Magnetic Fields Module


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

In a similar fashion a single value of y can be added or eliminated from the list using the arrows. All values

can be removed from the list with:

Warning: Reducing the steps for “x” or computing for many “y” values may substantially reduce
the speed at which the results are displayed.

When changing the plotting range and number of plots to be presented it is recommended to start with a large
value of Step X. This will allow fast refreshing of the display. When the correct number of plots and span
have been determined, then the user can re-adjust the Step X value to produce smooth plots.
The last set of values entered will remain in memory until the CYMCAP thermal simulation is launched again.
Solving the execution for a second time will erase the values and the defaults will be used.
The values are saved with the execution for future use (if the execution is saved).

20 – The Magnetic Fields Module  327


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Reporting
The easiest way to produce a graphical report is by clicking on the copy to clipboard icon . This will copy
the plot to clipboard to be pasted in a Word Document for example.

The tabular report can also be copied to clipboard, printed or saved by clicking on the appropriate icon.

328  20 – The Magnetic Fields Module


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

21 – The Cables Crossing Module

Introduction
The cables crossing module (XING) is an optional add-on to CYMCAP that allows the user to determine the
steady state ampacity of two circuits crossing each other. Besides the usual installation data, the user only
needs to provide the crossing angle.
When two circuits cross each other, each of them behaves as a heat source for the other one. The amount of
generated heat, the vertical distance between the crossing circuits and the crossing angle are the important
parameters that influence the crossing rating. In the absence of crossing calculations, the general practice is
to use the conservative result where the circuits are assumed to be parallel. When the circuits are parallel, the
thermal interaction is maximum. It goes to a minimum when they cross each other at a right angle. Using the
conservative approach derates unnecessarily both the circuits. Crossing calculations show improvements up
to 20% compared to the conservative ampacities can be obtained.
The derating factor of each circuit is defined as the ratio of its permissible current in the presence of crossing
circuit over its normal rating when it is alone. Based on the IEC standard, an iterative approach is used to
obtain the derating factors for both circuits. Initially, it is assumed that circuit 1 is carrying its highest
permissible ampacity when it is alone. The derating factor for the circuit number 2 is calculated. Then, it is
assumed that circuit number 2 is carrying its derated ampacity and the derating factor for circuit 1 is
calculated. Now the derating factor for circuit 2 is computed for the second time based on the new rating of
circuit 1. This procedure is iterated until the derating factors for both circuits converge to their final values.
Both the derating factors and the final currents are reported.
Summary of features
 Capable of modeling two circuits crossings each other in the same installation.
 The cable crossing is supported in directly buried underground, buried ducts and buried pipes
underground.
o
 Crossing angles less than 15 are considered as parallel
As per IEC, the following limitations apply.
Limitations
 Transient analysis is not supported.
 Temperature is not supported.
 Cyclic loading is not supported.

21 – The Cables Crossing Module  329


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Creating a cable crossings installation


In this section, an example of the cables crossing module in operation is illustrated. The installation has two
circuits crossing each other at an angle of 90.0 degrees. In the next page, step-by-step instructions will show
how to create this type of installation.

330  21 – The Cables Crossing Module


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Creating a cables crossing installation


Open the Navigator to access the Study window. Click the button New Study to create a new installation. To
start from scratch, answer No to the question.

Enter the Study ID, Study title and Execution title to identify the execution.

Click OK to continue. The Solution Option dialog box will be displayed. For this example, select the
Unequally loaded and click OK.

21 – The Cables Crossing Module  331


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Click the Directly Buried button in the Execution bar to start building a cables crossing installation.

As with the other types of installations, CYMCAP will ask you to indicate the Ambient temperature and the
Native soil thermal resistivity. For this example, the values will be 20.0 degrees for the Ambient
Temperature and 0.9 for the Native soil thermal resistivity.

The Installation setup dialog box will allow defining the circuits that are used in the installation. Enter 1
three-phase circuit made of one core cables and 1 three-phase circuit in trefoil formation. Click OK to
continue.

332  21 – The Cables Crossing Module


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

The last Installation step before entering the cables location is to activate the cable crossings module. Click
the item Edit on the top menu to drop down the submenu items. Click on Solution Option to open a submenu
and select the item Cable crossings Analysis to activate it. To deactivate it make the same procedure again.

21 – The Cables Crossing Module  333


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Installing cables
Open the Installation data window to build the cable installation. Select the first three cables of the list and
click Edit button.

Enter the most top left position of cables to –0.15 for X and 1.00 for Y. Enter 0.15 for the Horizontal distance
between cables and select 3 for the number of columns. Click OK button to accept. If you prefer to see the
cable positions as in the previous types of analysis, deactivate the cable crossing, position the cables and
then when you are satisfied with the positions turn back to cable crossing view by the way you activated in the
first place.

334  21 – The Cables Crossing Module


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Select the last cable from the list and click Edit button.

Enter 0.0 for X and 1.50 for Y for cable position. Click on More button to enter the angle of that cable.

21 – The Cables Crossing Module  335


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Click on the Angle check box and click the small button just right after the edit box to enter the angle value.
This button will open the angle preview dialog box that allows the user to enter the smallest angle in degree.
This angle applies to the cable that is selected. The angle range is from 15 to 90.0 degree. For this example,
enter a value of 90.0 and click OK to accept. Once the dialog box has been closed, click OK again to accept
the final position of the cable.

336  21 – The Cables Crossing Module


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

In the cable legend, the red color represents the current cable being installed and the one in black is the
previously installed circuit.
Here is the final position of cables for the cable crossing analysis.

21 – The Cables Crossing Module  337


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Complete the specific installation data


Next step is to complete the specific installation data for the two types of cables used in the installation. To do
this just click on the Specific Installation Data icon highlighted with a red square in the following figure.

Make the same selection as shown from the picture below and click the Previous Cable button to enter next
group of values for the other cable type.

338  21 – The Cables Crossing Module


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Once all items are selected for the second cable type, click OK to accept all changes.

Save and start the simulation


Before starting the simulation, make sure you save the execution.
Solve the simulation and open the Steady-State Report after finishing the calculation.

21 – The Cables Crossing Module  339


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

By default, the steady state report gives the ampacity and temperature of all cables followed by derating
factors and derated currents.
Congratulations! The example has been completed successfully. Close the execution and make sure to save
if you have not done it already. You can compare the results by choosing circuit one or two. When you
choose these options the results for the case the selected circuit is alone will be shown. Also you may
compare the results with the parallel case by running the installation with the cables crossing deactivated.
Back to the navigator with the new study just created.

340  21 – The Cables Crossing Module


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

22 – The Cables Impedance


Calculation Module

Introduction
The cables impedance calculation module (ZMat) is an optional add-on to CYMCAP that determines the
electrical parameters for cables necessary for performing network studies at the power frequency (50/60 Hz).
The input data of the ZMat module is the geometrical information gathered by the CYMCAP GUI regarding
the installation and including the construction details of all the single-core cables in the installation.
The estimation of parameters is performed after an ampacity or temperature steady state simulation has been
successfully completed. This serves to assure that all geometrical data has been entered and to establish the
operating temperature of all components.
CYMCAP already computes the resistances of all layers of all cables considering the dependency with
temperature, the skin effect, the proximity effects and construction details such as length of lay of concentric
and armour wires.
For impedance calculations, each metallic component of each cable (conductor, sheath, concentric wires, and
armour) is explicitly represented in the primitive impedance matrices. The earth effect is considered with the
Carson expressions. The primitive impedance is reduced to phase conductors taking into consideration the
bonding type:

Bonding Type Operations


Single-point bonding There are three possible operations:
Two-point bonding
(Only even spacing is supported, uneven Neglect sheaths and wires – when the
spacing can be modeled with multiple runs) zero sequence returns only in the
ground.
Two-point bonding + transposition
(Only regular transposition is supported)
Apply Kron reduction – when the zero
Cross bonding sequence current returns in the ground
(Only equal minor lengths are supported) and the sheaths/wires

Separate Neutral Wire(s)


Apply the Neutral Current Return
Two-point bonding
Reduction when the current returns
Separate Neutral Wire(s) only in the sheaths and wires
Single-point bonding

22 – The Cables Impedance Calculation Module  341


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Multiple cables per phase (parallel cables) are considered, just as in CYMCAP.
The final results are the positive and zero sequence impedances and admittances for all the cables present in
an installation.
All impedance and admittance matrices are displayed in the report: starting from the primitive matrices per
section per metallic component, the transposed matrixes (if they exist), the reduced to phase conductors’
matrices after and the resulting symmetrical components matrixes. The diagonal elements of the latter
matrix, which represent the (self) positive and zero sequence impedances are extracted from the matrix, but it
is up to the user to decide whether or not the mutual coupling between sequence components is negligible for
the application.
For admittance calculations, when concentric wires, sheaths or armours are present mutual admittances
between cables are neglected (shielding effect). When the cables have no shields admittance calculations
are not supported.

Note: For the moment, the parameters are computed (initially) only for single-core cables forming
a three-phase circuit. They are not computed for three-core cables, single-phase cables and
pipe-type cables.

Summary of features
 Capable of computing the sequence impedances for all the cables present in an installation.
 Capable of modeling the sequence admittances for all cables present in an installation.
 Multiple cables per phase are supported.
 One or more neutrals can be modeled and taken into consideration in the calculations.

342  22 – The Cables Impedance Calculation Module


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

How to generate the impedance calculation report


For this example, I will use an existing case already built with two three phase circuits.
Look at the picture of the case below.

Click on the Solve button to make the calculation. Once calculation is completed, click on the Excel report
button.

22 – The Cables Impedance Calculation Module  343


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

The following dialog box will appear. Check the “Impedance & Admittance” option to get the impedance
calculation report.

Click OK to generate the Excel report.

Note: If you want to account for one or more neutrals in the calculations, you need to model these
neutrals directly in the installation by selecting the option “Use as Neutral” in the window
below and entering the number of neutrals you want to model.

344  22 – The Cables Impedance Calculation Module


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

The neutrals will be taken into account in the calculations and the appropriate results will be displayed in the
Impedance report.

22 – The Cables Impedance Calculation Module  345


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Impedance report
The impedance report shows in details all the matrices computed by the ZMAT module in order to come up
with accurate values of sequence impedances for cables installations supported by CYMCAP.

R Primitive and X Primitive matrices


The R primitive and the X primitive matrices explicitly represent each metallic component of each cable
(conductor, sheath, concentric wires and armour). The elements of the primitive matrix are computed using
Carson’s equations, but computing the conductor resistance as per IEC 60287-1-1 (considering skin and
proximity effects) and the Geometrical Mean Radius using the IEC Standard 60287-1-3.

346  22 – The Cables Impedance Calculation Module


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

R Bonding and X Bonding matrices


The primitive matrices are reduced to bonding matrices depending on the bonding type of the cables. If the
cables are single-point bonded, sheaths, concentric wires and armours are eliminated because they carry no
short-circuit current. If the cables are two-point bonded or cross-bonded, no modification is made to the
primitive matrices. Bonding matrices and primitive matrices are similar.

22 – The Cables Impedance Calculation Module  347


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

R Phase and X Phase matrices


For single-point bonded cables, Phase matrices are equal to Bonding matrices. No modification is made to
the bonding matrices in order to get the Phase matrices.
For two-point bonded and cross-bonded cables, Kron reduction is applied to the Bonding matrices in order to
get the Phase matrices.

R Circuit and X Circuit matrices


For circuits with multiple cables per phase, the phase matrices are reduced to circuit matrices in which circuits
are reduced to equivalent circuits with one cable per phase.

348  22 – The Cables Impedance Calculation Module


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

R Sequence and X Sequence matrices


Circuit matrices are transformed into the resulting symmetrical components matrices.

R Sequence/R1 and X Sequence/R1 matrices

22 – The Cables Impedance Calculation Module  349


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Symmetrical components matrix


The diagonal elements of these matrices, which represent the (self) positive and the zero sequence
impedances are extracted from the matrix, but it is up to the user to decide whether or not the mutual coupling
between sequence components is negligible for the application.

Admittance report

Y Primitive, Y Circuit and Y Sequence matrices


For cables having concentric wires, sheaths or armours (shielded cables), the admittance matrix is diagonal
due to the shielding effect of the metallic screens. Unshielded cables will not be supported for the calculation
of the admittance matrix.
Besides, when multiple cables per phase (parallel circuits) are present, the sequence admittances are simply
the multiplication by the number of cables per phase.

350  22 – The Cables Impedance Calculation Module


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Concentric neutral cables


1. Conductor sizing and construction

Size Nominal Cross section Solid Compact Stranded Stranded


AWG/KCMIL mm2 D(mm) D(mm) D(mm)
8 8.37 3.26 3.40 3.71
6 13.30 4.12 4.29 4.67
4 21.15 5.19 5.41 5.89
2 33.62 6.54 6.81 7.41
1 42.41 7.35 7.60 8.43
1/0 53.51 8.25 8.55 9.47
2/0 67.44 9.27 9.57 10.62
3/0 85.02 10.80 11.94
4/0 107.20 12.10 13.41
250 126.70 13.20 14.60
350 177.30 15.70 17.30
500 253.40 18.70 20.65
600 304.00 20.60 22.68
650 329.40 21.40 23.59
750 380.00 23.00 25.35
1000 506.70 26.90 29.69
1250 633.40 32.74
1500 760.10 35.86
Table 1.1 Conductor sizes and construction supported.

D in the table above signifies Diameter. The conductor construction choice is restricted by the conductor size
according to table 1.1.

2. Conductor screen thickness

Conductor size (mm2) < 107.2 107.2 - 253.4 >253.4

Screen thickness (mm) 0.4 0.5 0.6

Table 1.2 Conductor screen thickness according to conductor size.

22 – The Cables Impedance Calculation Module  351


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

3. Insulation thickness

Conductor size Insulation thickness


Rated kV
(mm2) (mm)
5 8.37 - 506.7 2.29
> 506.7 3.55
8 13.3 - 506.7 2.92
> 506.7 4.44
15 32.62 - 506.7 4.44
> 506.7 5.58
25 All sizes 6.60
28 All sizes 7.11
35 All sizes 8.76
46 All sizes 11.56
>46 All sizes 11.56
Table 1.3 Insulation Thickness as per size and rated kV.

4. Insulation screen thickness


In the following table D stands for Diameter

D over insulation(mm) <25.4 25.4-38.0 38.1-50.8 >50.8

Screen thickness (mm) 1.28 1.6 1.95 2.15

Table 1.4 Insulation screen thickness as per inner diameter

5. Jacket Thickness
In the following table D stands for diameter.

D over everything but jacket (mm) <17.8 17.8-38.0 38.0-63.5 >63.5

Jacket thickness(mm) 1.2 1.6 2.2 2.9

Table 1.5 Jacket thickness as per inner diameter.

6. Concentric neutral
In the following table D stands for Diameter

Conductor size Concentric wire D Number of wires


8 AWG 2.05 mm 11
6 AWG 2.05 mm 11
4 AWG 2.05 mm 11
2 AWG 2.05 mm 11
1 AWG 2.05 mm 11
1/0 AWG 2.05 mm 11
2/0 AWG 2.05 mm 14
3/0 AWG 2.05 mm 14
4/0 AWG 2.05 mm 22
250 KCMIL 2.05 mm 22
350 KCMIL 2.05 mm 18
500 KCMIL 2.05 mm 26
600 KCMIL 2.05 mm 26

352  22 – The Cables Impedance Calculation Module


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Conductor size Concentric wire D Number of wires


650 KCMIL 2.05 mm 26
750 KCMIL 2.58 mm 24
1000 KCMIL 2.58 mm 32
1250 KCMIL 2.58 mm 33
1500 KCMIL 2.58 mm 32
Table 1.6 Concentric neutral assembly as per conductor size.

The length of lay of the concentric neutral wires is taken to be 8 times the diameter of the cable under the wire
assembly.

Extruded dielectric cables


1. Conductor sizes and construction
Same as for Concentric neutral cables, above. See table 1.1

2. Conductor screen thickness

Conductor area (mm2) 126.67 26.67-253.35 53.35-506.7 506.7

Conductor screen thickness (mm) 381 508 635 762

Table 2.1 Conductor screen thickness as per conductor size.

3. Insulation Thickness

Rated Voltage Conductor size Insulation thickness


in kV in mm2 in mm
46 126.67 13
126.67-1013.4 13
69 < 253.35 16.5
253.35-1013.4 16.5
115 760.00 20.32
760.00-1520.0 20.32
138 < 760.00 21.6
760.00-1520.0 21.6
Table 2.2 Insulation thickness as per size and rated kV.

4. Insulation screen thickness.


In the following table D stands for diameter

D over insulation (mm) < 25.4 25.4-38.1 38.1-50.8 >50.8

Insulation screen thickness (mm) 1.27 1.6 1.96 2.16

Table 2.3 Insulation screen thickness as per inner diameter.

22 – The Cables Impedance Calculation Module  353


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

5. Jacket thickness
The jacket thickness is universally taken to be 2.5 mm.

Low pressure oil filled cables (Type 3)


1. Conductor sizes and Construction

Conductor Size Nominal Cross section Compact Round Hollow core Outer D
AWG or KCMILS (mm2) D (mm) (mm)
1/0 50 8.53 -
2/0 70 9.55 -
3/0 85 10.74 -
4/0 110 12.06 20
250 130 13.21 21
300 150 14.48 22
350 180 15.65 23
400 200 16.74 24
450 230 17.78 25
500 250 18.69 28
550 280 19.68 28
600 300 20.25 30
650 330 21.46 28
700 350 22.27 29
750 380 23.06 32
800 400 23.08 33
900 460 25.40 34
1000 510 26.90 35
1250 630 - 36
1500 760 - 39
2000 1010 - 44
2500 1270 - 49
3000 1520 - 54
3500 1770 - 57
4000 2030 - 61
Table 3.1 Conductor sizes and construction types.

D in the table above signifies Diameter. The conductor construction choice is restricted by the conductor size
according to table 3.1.

2. Internal diameter for hollow conductor construction.


The default is universally taken to be 12.7 mm. (0.5 inch)

3. Conductor screen
Same as for Extruded dielectric cables.

354  22 – The Cables Impedance Calculation Module


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

4. Insulation Thickness

Rated Voltage Insulation


in kV thickness in mm
15 2.54
25 3.43
35 4.32
46 5.21
63 6.73
69 7.24
115 11.05
120 11.43
130 12.20
138 12.83
161 13.46
230 19.30
345 26.29
500 34.01
Table 3.2 Insulation thickness as per rated kV.

5. Insulation screen
Same as for Extruded dielectric cables.

6. Jacket thickness
The jacket thickness is universally taken to be 2.5 mm.

22 – The Cables Impedance Calculation Module  355


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

High pressure oil (gas) filled cables


1. Conductor sizes and construction

Sizes Nominal Cross Round D(mm) 4 or 6 Segments


AWG/KCMIL Section (mm2) Stranded Compact D (mm)
3/0 85 11.9 10.7 -
4/0 107 13.4 12. -
250 127 14.6 13.2 -
300 157 16.0 14.5 -
350 177 17.3 15.6 -
400 203 18.5 16.7 -
450 228 19.6 17.8 -
500 257 20.6 18.7 -
550 279 21.7 19.7 -
600 304 22.7 20.7 -
650 329 23.6 21.5 -
700 355 24.4 22.3 -
750 380 25.3 23.1 -
800 405 26.2 23.8 -
900 456 27.2 25.4 -
1000 507 29.3 26.9 29.3
1250 633 32.7 - 32.7
1500 760 35.9 - 35.9
1750 887 38.8 - 38.8
2000 1013 41.5 - 41.5
2250 1140 43.9 - 43.9
2500 1267 46.3 - 46.3
2750 1393 48.6 - 48.6
3000 1520 50.7 - 50.7
3250 1647 52.8 - 52.8
3500 1773 54.8 - 54.8
3750 1990 56.7 - 56.7
4000 2027 58.6 - 58.6
Table 4.1 Conductor sizes and construction types.

D in the table above signifies Diameter. The conductor construction choice is restricted by the conductor size
according to table 4.1.

2. Conductor screen
Same as for Extruded dielectric cables.

356  22 – The Cables Impedance Calculation Module


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

3. Insulation thickness

Rated Voltage Insulation


in kV thickness in mm
69 6.86
115 10.67
120 11.05
138 12.45
161 14.86
230 18.92
345 25.91
500 27.94
Table 4.2 Insulation thickness as per rated LV level.

4. Insulation screen
Same as for Extruded dielectric cables.

5. Skid Wires
 Skid Wire diameter is taken universally to be 5.08 mm. (0.2 inch)
 Number of skid wires is taken to be 2.
 Length of lay of skid wires is taken to be 76.2 mm. (3 inches)

22 – The Cables Impedance Calculation Module  357


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Sheath related defaults


1. Sheath Thickness
The sheath thickness defaults described below pertain to all types of cables supported. They are compiled
according to the practice followed for Low Pressure Oil Filled Cables. The calculation reads as follows:

Step A The quantities D1 and D2 are, at first, calculated based on whether the cable is a single conductor or a three core
cable:
For Single conductor cables:
D1 = ( D + 2T + 16 + 200 ) + 60
D2 = 1.03 ( D + 2T + 16 + 200 )
For three conductor cables:
D1 = ( 2.155 D + 4.31 T + 207 + 40 ) + 60
D2 = 1.03 ( 2.155 D + 4.31 T + 207 + 40 )
where:
D is the conductor diameter expressed in mils,
T is the insulation thickness expressed in mils
Xmm correspond to Ymils ={ (Xmm / 25.4 ) * 1000.00 }
Step B Take D3 = MAX ( D1, D2 )

Step C For LEAD sheath: S = 73.00 + 0.0270 D3 (mils)

The value calculated cannot be less than 110 (mils).

For SMOOTH ALUMINUM Sheath: S = 13.00 + 0.0400 D3 (mils)

For CORRUGATED ALUMINUM Sheath S = 19.90 + 0.0165 D3 (mils)


The inner radius of the corrugated sheath assembly is taken to be the cable radius under the sheath. The outer radius
of the corrugated sheath assembly is by default taken to be the inner radius plus twice the sheath thickness computed
above. The user should further adjust these dimensions for the particular case at hand if necessary.

2. Sheath Reinforcement
Reinforcing tape thickness = 0.127 mm (0.005 inch)
Tape over Insulation shield = 0.125 mm (0.0049 inch)
Reinforcing tape width/metallic binder = 25.4 mm (1 inch)
Number of reinforcing tapes =2
Length of lay of tapes = 29.21 mm (1.25 inch)
IEC related tape inclination = 54 degrees.
Oversheath thickness = 2.0 mm (0.0787 inch)

358  22 – The Cables Impedance Calculation Module


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Armour related defaults


The defaults depicted here will universally apply for all types of cables equipped with armour protection.

1. Armour Bedding

Cable Diameter under Bedding Thickness in mm


armour bedding in mm
Tape Armour Wire Armour
0 - 11.43 .76 1.14
11.43 - 19.05 1.14 1.14
19.05 - 25.40 1.14 1.65
25.40 - 63.50 1.65 2.03
> 63.50 1.65 2.41
Table F.1 Armour Bedding as per inner Cable Diameter.

2. Armour Serving

Cable diameter under Serving Thickness


Armour Serving in mm in mm
0.00 - 19.05 1.27
19.05 - 38.10 1.65
38.10 - 57.15 2.03
57.15 - 76.20 2.41
> 76.20 2.79
Table F.2 Armour Serving as per inner Cable Diameter

3. Armour Tapes

Cable diameter under Tape Thickness in


Bedding in mm mm
0.00 - 25.40 0.51
> 25.40 0.76
Table F.3 Armour Tape thickness as per inner Cable Diameter.

4. Armour Wires

Cable diameter under Armour Wire


Bedding in mm Diameter in mm
0.00 - 19.05 2.11
19.05 - 25.40 2.77
25.40 - 43.18 3.40
43.18 - 63.50 4.19
> 63.50 5.16
Table F.4 Armour Wire size as per inner diameter.

 The armour wires are assumed to be TOUCHING and the necessary number is calculated from the cable
dimensions.
 The length of lay of armour wires will be taken to be 1.3 times the diameter of the cable under armour.

22 – The Cables Impedance Calculation Module  359


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Three core cables


The defaults for Conductor sizes and construction, Conductor shield, Insulation thickness and Insulation
shield are the ones adopted for Extruded dielectric cables.
Sheath, and Armour assemblies follow the general sheath and armour defaults.

360  22 – The Cables Impedance Calculation Module


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

23 – The Soil Dry-Out Prevention


Module

Introduction
The Soil Dry-Out Prevention module is available only with the MDB installation add-on module. This add-on
to CYMCAP allows to rate the installation based on a temperature constraint at the duct bank/backfill
boundary with the native soil so the original soil content cannot exceed the moisture migration temperature
limit.
As is the case in MDB the module uses a finite element model of the cables environment to compute the
temperatures on a selected number of points in the soil. An iterative procedure allows the engine to rate the
cables efficiently while maintaining every point at the boundary of the MDB layers (backfills, ductbanks, filled
casings, …) below a specific temperature limit specified by the user.

Notes:  As the module is designed for dry-out prevention a unique temperature limit can be
imposed on all the MDB layers’ boundaries.
 The presence of heat sources or fixed ampacity circuits in the installation might prevent
the algorithm from finding a solution if the heat generated by those elements is already
too high with respect to the temperature limit.
 The steady-state ampacity mode currently supported in MDB installations is Unequally
loaded.

23 – The Soil Dry-Out Prevention Module  361


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

An illustrative example of the Dry-Out Prevention


computation
First, open an existing MDB installation. Make sure that the solution mode selected for this installation is
Unequally Loaded as the Dry-Out Prevention module is not allowed in Temperature mode.

Click on the Installation Data icon in the Execution bar to display the list of all the installed cables.
Select all the cables of a same circuit and click on the Edit button.

362  23 – The Soil Dry-Out Prevention Module


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Check the box and use the dropdown list to change “Conductor temperature” by “Boundary max. temp”. Enter
50.0°C for the boundary maximum temperature. It represents the critical temperature at which the moisture
migration process starts in the native soil. Then click on OK to accept the change. You will notice that the
interface forces all the cables in the installation to the same constraint as there can be only one critical
temperature for the whole installation.

Notes: It would not be possible to have one cable set to “Boundary max. temp” and another set to
“Conductor temperature”. Once “Boundary max. temp.” is selected it is applied to the
global installation.

23 – The Soil Dry-Out Prevention Module  363


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Once it is done, close the Installation Data dialog box to have a view of the entire installation and click on the
Solver icon in the Execution bar to start the calculation.

364  23 – The Soil Dry-Out Prevention Module


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

24 – The Parametric Study


Module

Introduction
CYMCAP Parametric Study is an optional add-on module that provides the ability to perform series of
simulation by varying one or more parameters of an installation. Some of the benefits of this module are the
following :
 Save time and work more efficiently
 Analyze and review easily the relation among various parameters and the thermal/current rating of
cables trough graphic and report outputs
 Find readily the optimal parameter values that apply for a study case.
Run a parametric study on CYMCAP requires :
 a model installation designed with all the required data to perform a simulation
 the identified parameters for the analysis use
 a list or range of values for each identified parameter

The module rests on enumeration techniques. It is based on exhaustive serial simulations of valid
combinations of the varying-parameter values and the others data of the installation model.

Note:  There is no limit imposed on the number of varying parameters and the number of
values thereof, however note that the execution time may be large depending on the
installation type and the number of simulations that have to be computed.

Scope
CYMCAP Parametric Study module supports Steady-State and Cyclic loading analysis. Only numerical
parameters can be varied. The module is available in all CYMCAP Installation Modules, specifically :
 Directly Buried, Buried Ducts and Buried Pipes modules
 Ductbank and Backfill modules
 Multiple Duct Banks module
 Filled Trough module
 Multiple Casings module
 Cables In Air/Riser Poles/Tunnel/Unfilled Trough modules
CYMCAP Parametric Study module has 4 categories of variable parameters. Only relevant and eligible
variable parameters are available in each CYMCAP Installation Module.

24 – The Parametric Study Module  365


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

The supported variable parameters in each category are the following :

Availability per Installation


Variable categories Variable parameters
Module
Ambient temperature All Installation Modules
Directly Buried, Buried Ducts,
Environmental data
Native soil thermal resistivity Buried Pipes, Ductbank, Backfill,
MDB, Filled Trough, Tunnel
Ampacity All Installation Modules
Temperature All Installation Modules
Rating Data Directly Buried, Buried Ducts,
Load Factor Buried Pipes, Ductbank, Backfill,
MDB, Filled Trough
Installation thermal resistivity
Installation depth
Installation X coordinate Ductbank, Backfill, MDB, Filled
Backfill/Ductbank/Trough data
Installation width Trough
Installation height
Installation diameter
Circuit depth
Directly Buried, Buried Ducts,
Circuit X coordinate
Cable layout Buried Pipes, Ductbank, Backfill,
Spacing between cables
MDB, Filled Trough
Duct size

Note:  The non-eligibility of some parameters are imposed by the theoretical background of
CYMCAP. As an example, the analytical approach for the thermal/current rating of
cables installed in air is intended for identical cables with equal loading in a specific
arrangement. Therefore, the cable layout parameters and the load factor parameter are
not eligible for this installation type.

Some specificities:
 The parameter Duct size is allowed for duct installation having 1 or 3 cables inside .
 The parameter Spacing between cables is allowed for 3 phase circuit in flat formation, and for 3
phase circuit in trefoil formation with each cable inside duct.

366  24 – The Parametric Study Module


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Example of parametric study


This section illustrates how to build and run a parametric study with CYMCAP Parametric Study module.
The following study case is taken as an example:
- The model installation is a three-phase circuit directly buried with cables in flat formation. The metallic
screen of the cable is bonded at one end
- The object is to assess the impact on the current rating of the cables when varying the spacing
between the cables, for different seasons in the year.

The identified parameters for the analysis are Ambient temperature and Spacing between cables

24 – The Parametric Study Module  367


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Invoking CYMCAP Parametric Study module


The Parametric Study module is invoked trough the menu Analysis on the main menu bar.

Once clicking on Parametric Study… , the following window will appear :

368  24 – The Parametric Study Module


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Buttons on the window


Add : Create a new scenario or add a new parameter to a scenario
Edit : Rename a scenario title or change a parameter in a scenario
Copy : Duplicate a created scenario
Delete : Delete a scenario or a parameter
Validate : Check if the inputs are consistent and in the allowable range of values
Cancel : Ignore all actions done until then
Run : Save all the input entered and launch the parametric study
Save : Save all inputs entered until then
Cancel : Ignore all actions done until then and close the parametric study window

Building a scenario
A scenario gathers one or several parameters of the model installation to be varied. A parameter in a
scenario should be seen as a loop of n iterations, n being the number of different values defined for the
parameter. Hence, for a scenario built with two parameters, we have a loop within another loop.

Note: There is no limit imposed in the number of varying-parameters that can be included in a scenario,
neither in the number of scenarios that can be built. However note that the execution time may be
large depending on the number of simulations that have to be computed.

24 – The Parametric Study Module  369


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

To build a scenario, first add the scenario title:

370  24 – The Parametric Study Module


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Then, add the desired parameters to vary in the scenario one after another. For this example, there are two
identified parameters to vary. The first one added is Ambient temperature available in the variable category
Environmental data, and the second one is Spacing between cables available in the category Cable
layout .

24 – The Parametric Study Module  371


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Repeat the same pattern from point 4 to 8 to add the others desired parameters.

372  24 – The Parametric Study Module


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Viewing the results of the parametric study


If building the scenario(s) is done, click the Run button to launch the parametric study. Once the analysis is
completed, the window of results will appear. The window has two tabs : Simulations and Graphs. The
results can be read per scenario. To view the results of one scenario, select the desired one in the list box on
top of the window.

Simulations tab

1- These four columns constitute the simulation results :


 Successful : Give the status of the simulation. Yes if the simulation has been successfully run
without errors, or No if not.
 Highest temperature : For each simulation run, is displayed the highest conductor temperature in the
installation
 Highest ampacity : For each simulation run, is displayed the highest current load in the installation
 Circuit with highest ampacity : For each simulation run, is displayed the circuit of the installation
loaded with the highest current.

2- These columns represent the simulation data. They depend on the inputs of the user.

3- In this part of the window is displayed the warning and/or errors message explaining issues that can
possibly occur during a simulation.

The button Report… generates an Excel report with detailed results of each simulation of each scenario.

24 – The Parametric Study Module  373


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

The button Create execution creates the corresponding execution to the selected simulations

After the creation of the selected simulation is completed, close the results window, and go back to the
Navigator window to view the created executions. It is possible to view the value of the modified parameters
of each execution at the bottom of the Navigator window.

Note:  For parameters that involved the displacement of an element in the installation, it is possible to
notice very slight difference between the results obtained from the parametric study and the
ones obtained from the created execution, in MDB module. This is mainly due to the difference
of variable precision between the CYMCAP GUI and the CYMCAP ENGINE. Indeed, the mesh
generator of MDB module is very sensitive even to the smallest variation of an element
coordinates.

374  24 – The Parametric Study Module


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Graphs tab

Y-Axis
The Y-axis can be either the Ampacity or the Conductor Temperature
Series of points
There are three types of series of points :
 Series of points constituted of the simulation results : If Ampacity is selected as Y-axis, the values
correspond to the maximum current load in the installation; If Conductor temperature is selected as Y-
axis, then the values correspond to the highest conductor temperature in the installation.
 Series of points constituted of the circuit results : If Ampacity is selected as Y-axis, the values
correspond to the current load in the selected circuit; If Conductor temperature is selected as Y-axis,
then the values correspond to the conductor temperature of the hottest cable of the selected circuit.
 Series of points constituted of the cable results : If Ampacity is selected as Y-axis, the values correspond
to the current load in the selected cable; If Conductor temperature is selected as Y-axis, the values
correspond to the conductor temperature of the selected cable.
X-Axis
The X-axis depends on the series of points selected and the number of varying parameters in the scenario :

 Regardless of the number of varying parameters of a scenario, if the series of points is constituted of the
simulation results, the X-axis is always the simulation index number.
 If the scenario has only one varying parameter, the X-axis corresponds to the varying parameter.
 If the scenario has 2 varying parameters, it is possible to choose one or the other as the X-axis.
 If the scenario has more than 2 varying parameters, the X-axis is the simulation index number.

24 – The Parametric Study Module  375


CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Bonding............................................................... 84
Building a scenario ........................................... 369
Building the installation ..................................... 222

Index Cable components, materials and


construction ..................................................... 16
Cable damage curve calculation ...................... 315

Accuracy of CYMCAP and References .............. 63 Cable damage curve displayed on time
current plot .................................................... 319
Add a new backfill to the MDB installation
using the toolbox ........................................... 167 Cable damage curve results ............................. 316

Adding more trays and circuits to an Cable data in studies ............................................ 9


execution ....................................................... 249 Cable design data window elements .................. 13
Additional cable installation salient aspects ........ 83 Cable Installation Data ....................................... 83
Admittance report .............................................. 350 Cable Installation types ...................................... 84
Ambient temperature and soil resistivity ............. 76 Cable layers ........................................................ 34
Ampacity as a function of Temperature ............ 137 Cable Library ........................................................ 9
Ampacity as a function of Time ......................... 138 Cable Library - Introduction .................................. 9
Analysis options .................................................. 74 Cable Library data and executions ..................... 89
Append a database to another database .......... 188 Cable library pop-up menu ................................. 12
Approximate Temperature Field ....................... 149 Cable library window .......................................... 10
Armour bedding/Armour serving ......................... 27 Cable library window commands ........................ 10
Armour/Reinforcing tape ..................................... 26 Cable transposition ............................................. 87
Assign a load curve to cable(s) in the Cables............................................................... 164
installation using the toolbox ......................... 167
Cables Crossing Module .................................. 329
Assign loads to cables ...................................... 142
Cables in Troughs Module................................ 271
Asymmetrical troughs........................................ 279
Cables touching .................................................. 87
Automatic design of backfills/duct banks .......... 153
Calculating the final temperature ...................... 313
Automatic installation of backfills ...................... 228
Case description and illustrations ..................... 141
Backup the contents of the working
directory to another directory ......................... 188 Casings (working for Multiple casings only) ..... 166

Barring certain bonding options .......................... 86 Change the color of the curves for the
transient reports ............................................ 147
Basic Operation ................................................. 323
Change the connection line between the
Basic Operation – Cables in Tunnels cable and its associated label ....................... 114
module ........................................................... 241
Change the properties of a label .............. 115, 116
Basic operations ........................................ 315, 318
Changing the Plotting Parameters ................... 326
Basic Use - Cables in Troughs ......................... 273
Complete duct bank data.................................. 209

Index  377
CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Complete non-standard duct bank data ............ 224 Curves libraries command buttons ..................... 51
Complete the specific installation data227, 300, 338 Custom materials and thermal
capacitances ................................................... 35
Completing backfill data .................................... 211
Customize installation defaults on creation ...... 179
Computing the Magnetic Flux Density .............. 323
Customizing the isotherms ............................... 151
Concentric neutral cables.................................. 351
CYMCAP GUI ....................................................... 3
Concentric neutral wires...................................... 24
CYMCAP libraries and utilities - Overview ........... 4
Conductor construction ....................................... 18
CYMCAP menu for opened executions............ 173
Conductor data .................................................... 17
CYMCAP Utilities .............................................. 187
Conductor material .............................................. 18
CYMCAP Utilities - Introduction........................ 187
Conductor shield data ......................................... 20
Default Short Circuit Final Temperature
Configuring the Optimizer ................................. 305
Values ........................................................... 314
Contents of CYMCAP ........................................... 3
Defaults – Overview ......................................... 193
Copy selected items to a given data base ........ 190
Defaults for Various Types of Cables ............... 193
Create a Load Curve using existing shapes ....... 52
Define a new execution starting from
Creating a cable crossings installation.............. 330 scratch........................................................... 103
Creating a cables crossing installation .............. 331 Define a new execution using an existing
Creating a multiple casing ................................. 287 one as template ............................................ 102

Creating a multiple duct bank ........................... 199 Defining a new study and a new execution ........ 91

Creating a new cable .......................................... 28 Defining standard and/or non-standard duct


banks............................................................... 95
Creating a new duct bank ................................... 40
Defining the cable installation data ..................... 98
Creating a new job template ............................. 233
Defining the general installation data and
Creating a new shape ......................................... 45 setup ............................................................... 97
Creating a New Study ....................................... 243 Description of symbols per category ................ 164
Creating a Non-standard Multiple Casing ......... 286 Designate AC conductor resistance values...... 186
Creating a Non-Standard Multiple Duct Designate the AC system frequency for the
Bank............................................................... 221 session .......................................................... 186
Creating a Standard Multiple Duct Bank ........... 198 Designate the system of units for the
Creating a study .................................................. 72 session .......................................................... 186

Creating a Study for Cables in Filled Designate the working directory for
Troughs ......................................................... 274 CYMCAP ....................................................... 187

Creating a Study for Cables in Tunnels ............ 243 Dielectric loss factors for insulating
materials.......................................................... 21
Creating a Study for Cables in Unfilled
Troughs ......................................................... 280 Drying and impregnation .................................... 19

Creating a Study from Scratch .......................... 259 Duct bank Library - Introduction ......................... 39

Curves and shapes ............................................. 43 Duct bank/duct materials and construction ........ 87

378  Index
CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Ductbank library management ............................ 39 How to hide linear dimensions of any layer ...... 218
Ductbanks (working for MDB only) ................... 165 How to insert a job template into a MDB
installation ..................................................... 237
Edit and save a template as a new one ............ 236
How to move location of linear dimensions
Enter a group of cables using absolute
of any layer ................................................... 216
coordinates .................................................... 105
IEC scope extended ......................................... 184
Enter a trefoil formation using relative
coordinates .................................................... 106 Impedance report ............................................. 346
Example of parametric study............................. 367 Import CSV file with CYMTCC application ....... 318
Example of the Dry-Out Prevention Importing a duct bank from the Library............... 96
computation ................................................... 362
Informing CYMCAP that a transient
Example of the Duct Bank optimizer ................. 304 analysis is to be performed ........................... 140
Excel report ....................................................... 122 Installation of cables ......................... 212, 225, 295
Execution speed bar and associated Installing backfills or soil layers ........................ 205
command buttons ............................................ 93
Installing cables ................................................ 334
Expanding and collapsing the curves ................. 50
Installing casings .............................................. 290
Export cable damage curve to CYMTCC
Installing CYMCAP for Windows .......................... 2
import file ....................................................... 317
Installing duct banks ......................................... 202
Extruded dielectric cables ................................. 353
Installing ducts .................................................. 293
Filter Editor .......................................................... 36
Installing non-standard duct banks ................... 223
For Backfill......................................................... 180
Insulation data .................................................... 21
For Casing ......................................................... 182
Insulation screen ................................................ 22
For Duct............................................................. 181
Introduction – Additional Modules .................... 195
For Duct in Casing ............................................ 182
Introduction – Cables Crossing module ........... 329
For Ductbank ..................................................... 180
Introduction – Cables Impedance
For General Ratings .......................................... 179
calculation ..................................................... 341
For Trough......................................................... 181
Introduction – Cables in Troughs module......... 271
Fraction of return current for single phase
Introduction – Cables in Tunnels module ......... 241
cables .............................................................. 88
Introduction - Duct Bank Optimizer .................. 303
General data for the installation .......................... 76
Introduction – Magnetic Fields module ............. 321
Generate the reports ......................................... 145
Introduction – Multiple Casings module ........... 285
Geometrical configuration of the installation ....... 83
Introduction - Multiple Duct Bank module......... 197
Graphs tab ........................................................ 375
Introduction - Parametric Study ........................ 365
Heat Sources .................................................... 165
Introduction - Short Circuit Rating Module ....... 309
High pressure oil (gas) filled cables .................. 356
Introduction – Soil Dry-Out Prevention ............. 361
How to generate the impedance calculation
report ............................................................. 343

Index  379
CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Invoking the CYMCAP Parametric Study Pipe material and dimensions ............................ 88
module ........................................................... 368
Pipe-type cables parameters ............................ 312
Invoking the Optimizer ...................................... 304
Populating the CYMCAP libraries......................... 6
Jacket around each core (SL-type cables
Preliminary considerations ............................... 133
only) ................................................................. 25
R Bonding and X Bonding matrices ................. 347
Jacket, oversheath and pipe coating
material ............................................................ 28 R Circuit and X Circuit matrices........................ 348

Jobs template .................................................... 166 R Phase and X Phase matrices........................ 348

Keep all labels positions permanently............... 120 R Primitive and X Primitive matrices ................ 346

Label grid editor ................................................ 112 R Sequence and X Sequence matrices ........... 349

Library of studies and executions ....................... 66 R Sequence/R1 and X Sequence/R1


matrices......................................................... 349
Load and Heat Source Libraries
Management .................................................... 48 Rapidly add a cable(s) to an installation ........... 162

Load Curve from field-recorded data or an Rearranging the cables in the proper ducts100, 101
Excel file .......................................................... 57 Reference circuit and complete the specific
Load curves (working with Transient installation data ............................................. 214
Analysis activated only) ................................. 166 References ......................................................... 64
Load-Curves/Heat Source Curves and Reporting .......................................................... 328
Shape Libraries ............................................... 43
Reset all labels to their default positions .......... 119
Low pressure oil filled cables (Type 3).............. 354
Results reporting .............................................. 110
Methodology and computational standards ........ 61
Running the Optimizer ...................................... 306
Modeling Assumptions ...................................... 321
Running the SCR module ................................. 310
Modify the solution option from the
CYMCAP menu ............................................. 103 Save and start the simulation ........... 220, 300, 339

Moisture migration modeling ............................... 77 Saving your parameters ................................... 313

Moving the trough down .................................... 278 Scope................................................................ 365

Multiple cables per phase ................................... 82 Select/move/align labels ................................... 113

Multiple Casings Module ................................... 285 Setting the steady state analysis solution
Option.............................................................. 92
Non isothermal earth surface modeling .............. 76
Shape Library Management ............................... 44
Opening more than one executions
simultaneously ............................................... 128 Sheath ................................................................ 23

Other Libraries - Introduction .............................. 43 Sheath reinforcing material................................. 23

Overview of CYMCAP ........................................... 1 Sheath related defaults..................................... 358

Overview of CYMCAP menu ............................. 171 Shifting a shape .................................................. 47

Particular modeling ............................................. 34 Short Circuit Rating Calculations ...................... 310

Permutable Trefoils ........................................... 252 Show the installation drag & drop toolbox ........ 161
Simulation control parameters .......................... 183

380  Index
CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Skid wires ............................................................ 24 Tag specific items from the Libraries ................ 188
SL-type cables .................................................... 35 Temperature as a function of Time .................. 139
Software and hardware requirements ................... 2 Temperature Field - Introduction ...................... 149
Solve for Ampacity given Time and Temperature field – Scopes and limitations ..... 150
Temperature .................................................. 134
The Cables Impedance Calculation Module..... 341
Solve for Temperature given Time and
The Cables in Tunnels Module ......................... 241
Ampacity ........................................................ 135
The CYMCAP Menu ......................................... 171
Solve for Time given Ampacity and
Temperature .................................................. 136 The Duct Bank Optimizer Module .................... 303

Specific cable installation data ............................ 84 The Ductbank Library ......................................... 39

Specific installation data.................................... 109 The Edit menu - Execution ............................... 174

Specify a “fixed ampacity circuit” ...................... 107 The Electrical Tab ............................................. 124

Specify a heat source included in the The File menu ................................................... 171
installation ...................................................... 108 The File menu - Execution................................ 173
Specify the data for the transient analysis The Magnetic Fields Module ............................ 321
option ............................................................. 142
The Multiple Duct Banks Module ...................... 197
Specify the transient analysis option................. 141
The Options menu - Execution ......................... 175
Steady state analysis .......................................... 75
The Parametric Study Module .......................... 365
Steady state thermal analysis ............................. 90
The Sensitivity Analysis Option of
Steady State Thermal Analysis ........................... 61 CYMCAP ....................................................... 157
Steady State Thermal Analysis - General ........... 61 The Short Circuit Cable Rating Module ............ 309
Steady-state results labels ................................ 110 The Soil Dry-Out Prevention Module ................ 361
Steps to create a new cable ................................ 15 The View menu - Execution.............................. 174
Studies and executions ....................................... 65 The Window menu ............................................ 172
Studies with CYMCAP .......................................... 7 Theoretical Background – Cables in
Study case for dissimilar directly buried Tunnels module ............................................ 242
cables ............................................................ 102 Theoretical Background – Magnetic Fields
Study library pop-up menu .................................. 68 module .......................................................... 322

Submit the simulation ........................................ 144 Theoretical background for filled troughs ......... 271

Submitting more than one executions Theoretical background for unfilled troughs ..... 273
simultaneously ............................................... 131 Three core cables ............................................. 360
Summary of features ......................................... 342 Trace the transients results with the mouse ..... 148
Surrounding medium of the installation............... 77 Transient Analysis ............................................ 133
Switch to another category of symbols ............. 164 Transient Analysis - Example and
Symmetrical components matrix ....................... 350 Illustrations .................................................... 141

Tabular reports .................................................. 122 Transient Analysis - General ............................ 133

Index  381
CYMCAP 7.2 - Reference Manual and Users Guide

Transient analysis – How to proceed ................ 139


Transient analysis options................................. 134
Tunnel shape display ........................................ 267
Unventilated Tunnel to Ventilated Tunnel
Conversion .................................................... 266
Unventilated Tunnels ................................ 242, 243
Useful considerations .......................................... 34
Useful Toolbox for the Designer ....................... 161
Validation........................................................... 268
Ventilated Tunnel to Unventilated Tunnel
Conversion .................................................... 253
Ventilated Tunnels .................................... 243, 259
View/hide labels ................................................ 111
Viewing the graphical ampacity reports by
mouse selection............................................. 120
Viewing the results of the Optimizer ................. 307
Viewing the results of the parametric study ...... 373
Windows settings .................................................. 2
Working with more than one executions
simultaneously ............................................... 131
Y Primitive, Y Circuit and Y Sequence
matrices ......................................................... 350

382  Index

You might also like